• Home
  • History
  • Annotate
  • Line#
  • Navigate
  • Raw
  • Download
  • only in /asuswrt-rt-n18u-9.0.0.4.380.2695/release/src-rt-6.x.4708/toolchains/hndtools-armeabi-2011.09/share/doc/arm-arm-none-eabi/info/
1This is ld.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.13 from
2/scratch/jwlemke/2011.09-arm-eabi-lite/obj/binutils-src-2011.09-69-arm-none-eabi-i686-pc-linux-gnu/ld/ld.texinfo.
3
4INFO-DIR-SECTION Software development
5START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
6* Ld: (ld).                       The GNU linker.
7END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
8
9   This file documents the GNU linker LD (Sourcery CodeBench Lite
102011.09-69) version 2.21.53.
11
12   Copyright (C) 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
132000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
14Software Foundation, Inc.
15
16   Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
17under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
18any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
19Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
20Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
21Free Documentation License".
22
23
24File: ld.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Overview,  Up: (dir)
25
26LD
27**
28
29This file documents the GNU linker ld (Sourcery CodeBench Lite
302011.09-69) version 2.21.53.
31
32   This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
33Documentation License version 1.3.  A copy of the license is included
34in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
35
36* Menu:
37
38* Overview::                    Overview
39* Invocation::                  Invocation
40* Scripts::                     Linker Scripts
41
42* Machine Dependent::           Machine Dependent Features
43
44* BFD::                         BFD
45
46* Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
47* MRI::                         MRI Compatible Script Files
48* GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
49* LD Index::                       LD Index
50
51
52File: ld.info,  Node: Overview,  Next: Invocation,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top
53
541 Overview
55**********
56
57`ld' combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their
58data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in compiling
59a program is to run `ld'.
60
61   `ld' accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of
62AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax, to provide explicit and
63total control over the linking process.
64
65   This version of `ld' uses the general purpose BFD libraries to
66operate on object files. This allows `ld' to read, combine, and write
67object files in many different formats--for example, COFF or `a.out'.
68Different formats may be linked together to produce any available kind
69of object file.  *Note BFD::, for more information.
70
71   Aside from its flexibility, the GNU linker is more helpful than other
72linkers in providing diagnostic information.  Many linkers abandon
73execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
74`ld' continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors (or, in
75some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
76
77
78File: ld.info,  Node: Invocation,  Next: Scripts,  Prev: Overview,  Up: Top
79
802 Invocation
81************
82
83The GNU linker `ld' is meant to cover a broad range of situations, and
84to be as compatible as possible with other linkers.  As a result, you
85have many choices to control its behavior.
86
87* Menu:
88
89* Options::                     Command Line Options
90* Environment::                 Environment Variables
91
92
93File: ld.info,  Node: Options,  Next: Environment,  Up: Invocation
94
952.1 Command Line Options
96========================
97
98   The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
99practice few of them are used in any particular context.  For instance,
100a frequent use of `ld' is to link standard Unix object files on a
101standard, supported Unix system.  On such a system, to link a file
102`hello.o':
103
104     ld -o OUTPUT /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
105
106   This tells `ld' to produce a file called OUTPUT as the result of
107linking the file `/lib/crt0.o' with `hello.o' and the library `libc.a',
108which will come from the standard search directories.  (See the
109discussion of the `-l' option below.)
110
111   Some of the command-line options to `ld' may be specified at any
112point in the command line.  However, options which refer to files, such
113as `-l' or `-T', cause the file to be read at the point at which the
114option appears in the command line, relative to the object files and
115other file options.  Repeating non-file options with a different
116argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
117occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
118option.  Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
119noted in the descriptions below.
120
121   Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be
122linked together.  They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with
123command-line options, except that an object file argument may not be
124placed between an option and its argument.
125
126   Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you
127can specify other forms of binary input files using `-l', `-R', and the
128script command language.  If _no_ binary input files at all are
129specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
130message `No input files'.
131
132   If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
133assume that it is a linker script.  A script specified in this way
134augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
135linker script or the one specified by using `-T').  This feature
136permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
137or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
138`INPUT' or `GROUP' to load other objects.  Specifying a script in this
139way merely augments the main linker script, with the extra commands
140placed after the main script; use the `-T' option to replace the
141default linker script entirely, but note the effect of the `INSERT'
142command.  *Note Scripts::.
143
144   For options whose names are a single letter, option arguments must
145either follow the option letter without intervening whitespace, or be
146given as separate arguments immediately following the option that
147requires them.
148
149   For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two
150can precede the option name; for example, `-trace-symbol' and
151`--trace-symbol' are equivalent.  Note--there is one exception to this
152rule.  Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
153only be preceded by two dashes.  This is to reduce confusion with the
154`-o' option.  So for example `-omagic' sets the output file name to
155`magic' whereas `--omagic' sets the NMAGIC flag on the output.
156
157   Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from
158the option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
159immediately following the option that requires them.  For example,
160`--trace-symbol foo' and `--trace-symbol=foo' are equivalent.  Unique
161abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are accepted.
162
163   Note--if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler
164driver (e.g. `gcc') then all the linker command line options should be
165prefixed by `-Wl,' (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
166compiler driver) like this:
167
168       gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
169
170   This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
171silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.  Confusion
172may also arise when passing options that require values through a
173driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as a
174separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
175and the argument to the compiler.  In this case, it is simplest to use
176the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
177
178       gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
179
180   Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the
181GNU linker:
182
183`@FILE'
184     Read command-line options from FILE.  The options read are
185     inserted in place of the original @FILE option.  If FILE does not
186     exist, or cannot be read, then the option will be treated
187     literally, and not removed.
188
189     Options in FILE are separated by whitespace.  A whitespace
190     character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire
191     option in either single or double quotes.  Any character
192     (including a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character
193     to be included with a backslash.  The FILE may itself contain
194     additional @FILE options; any such options will be processed
195     recursively.
196
197`-a KEYWORD'
198     This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility.  The KEYWORD
199     argument must be one of the strings `archive', `shared', or
200     `default'.  `-aarchive' is functionally equivalent to `-Bstatic',
201     and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent to
202     `-Bdynamic'.  This option may be used any number of times.
203
204`--audit AUDITLIB'
205     Adds AUDITLIB to the `DT_AUDIT' entry of the dynamic section.
206     AUDITLIB is not checked for existence, nor will it use the
207     DT_SONAME specified in the library.  If specified multiple times
208     `DT_AUDIT' will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces
209     to use. If the linker finds an object with an audit entry while
210     searching for shared libraries, it will add a corresponding
211     `DT_DEPAUDIT' entry in the output file.  This option is only
212     meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
213
214`-A ARCHITECTURE'
215`--architecture=ARCHITECTURE'
216     In the current release of `ld', this option is useful only for the
217     Intel 960 family of architectures.  In that `ld' configuration, the
218     ARCHITECTURE argument identifies the particular architecture in
219     the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
220     archive-library search path.  *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family:
221     i960, for details.
222
223     Future releases of `ld' may support similar functionality for
224     other architecture families.
225
226`-b INPUT-FORMAT'
227`--format=INPUT-FORMAT'
228     `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
229     file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the `-b'
230     option to specify the binary format for input object files that
231     follow this option on the command line.  Even when `ld' is
232     configured to support alternative object formats, you don't
233     usually need to specify this, as `ld' should be configured to
234     expect as a default input format the most usual format on each
235     machine.  INPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the name of a particular
236     format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can list the
237     available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  *Note BFD::.
238
239     You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an
240     unusual binary format.  You can also use `-b' to switch formats
241     explicitly (when linking object files of different formats), by
242     including `-b INPUT-FORMAT' before each group of object files in a
243     particular format.
244
245     The default format is taken from the environment variable
246     `GNUTARGET'.  *Note Environment::.  You can also define the input
247     format from a script, using the command `TARGET'; see *note Format
248     Commands::.
249
250`-c MRI-COMMANDFILE'
251`--mri-script=MRI-COMMANDFILE'
252     For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, `ld' accepts script
253     files written in an alternate, restricted command language,
254     described in *note MRI Compatible Script Files: MRI.  Introduce
255     MRI script files with the option `-c'; use the `-T' option to run
256     linker scripts written in the general-purpose `ld' scripting
257     language.  If MRI-CMDFILE does not exist, `ld' looks for it in the
258     directories specified by any `-L' options.
259
260`-d'
261`-dc'
262`-dp'
263     These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported
264     for compatibility with other linkers.  They assign space to common
265     symbols even if a relocatable output file is specified (with
266     `-r').  The script command `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same
267     effect.  *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
268
269`--depaudit AUDITLIB'
270`-P AUDITLIB'
271     Adds AUDITLIB to the `DT_DEPAUDIT' entry of the dynamic section.
272     AUDITLIB is not checked for existence, nor will it use the
273     DT_SONAME specified in the library.  If specified multiple times
274     `DT_DEPAUDIT' will contain a colon separated list of audit
275     interfaces to use.  This option is only meaningful on ELF
276     platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.  The -P option is
277     provided for Solaris compatibility.
278
279`-e ENTRY'
280`--entry=ENTRY'
281     Use ENTRY as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
282     program, rather than the default entry point.  If there is no
283     symbol named ENTRY, the linker will try to parse ENTRY as a number,
284     and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted
285     in base 10; you may use a leading `0x' for base 16, or a leading
286     `0' for base 8).  *Note Entry Point::, for a discussion of defaults
287     and other ways of specifying the entry point.
288
289`--exclude-libs LIB,LIB,...'
290     Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should
291     not be automatically exported.  The library names may be delimited
292     by commas or colons.  Specifying `--exclude-libs ALL' excludes
293     symbols in all archive libraries from automatic export.  This
294     option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the
295     linker and for ELF targeted ports.  For i386 PE, symbols
296     explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of
297     this option.  For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this
298     option will be treated as hidden.
299
300`--exclude-modules-for-implib MODULE,MODULE,...'
301     Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which
302     symbols should not be automatically exported, but which should be
303     copied wholesale into the import library being generated during
304     the link.  The module names may be delimited by commas or colons,
305     and must match exactly the filenames used by `ld' to open the
306     files; for archive members, this is simply the member name, but
307     for object files the name listed must include and match precisely
308     any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
309     command-line.  This option is available only for the i386 PE
310     targeted port of the linker.  Symbols explicitly listed in a .def
311     file are still exported, regardless of this option.
312
313`-E'
314`--export-dynamic'
315`--no-export-dynamic'
316     When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the `-E'
317     option or the `--export-dynamic' option causes the linker to add
318     all symbols to the dynamic symbol table.  The dynamic symbol table
319     is the set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at
320     run time.
321
322     If you do not use either of these options (or use the
323     `--no-export-dynamic' option to restore the default behavior), the
324     dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols
325     which are referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
326
327     If you use `dlopen' to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
328     back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
329     dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
330     linking the program itself.
331
332     You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
333     be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports
334     it.  See the description of `--dynamic-list'.
335
336     Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports.  PE
337     targets support a similar function to export all symbols from a
338     DLL or EXE; see the description of `--export-all-symbols' below.
339
340`-EB'
341     Link big-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.
342
343`-EL'
344     Link little-endian objects.  This affects the default output
345     format.
346
347`-f NAME'
348`--auxiliary=NAME'
349     When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY
350     field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
351     the symbol table of the shared object should be used as an
352     auxiliary filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.
353
354     If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
355     you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY
356     field.  If the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter
357     object, it will first check whether there is a definition in the
358     shared object NAME.  If there is one, it will be used instead of
359     the definition in the filter object.  The shared object NAME need
360     not exist.  Thus the shared object NAME may be used to provide an
361     alternative implementation of certain functions, perhaps for
362     debugging or for machine specific performance.
363
364     This option may be specified more than once.  The DT_AUXILIARY
365     entries will be created in the order in which they appear on the
366     command line.
367
368`-F NAME'
369`--filter=NAME'
370     When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER
371     field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
372     the symbol table of the shared object which is being created
373     should be used as a filter on the symbol table of the shared
374     object NAME.
375
376     If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
377     you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER
378     field.  The dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the
379     symbol table of the filter object as usual, but it will actually
380     link to the definitions found in the shared object NAME.  Thus the
381     filter object can be used to select a subset of the symbols
382     provided by the object NAME.
383
384     Some older linkers used the `-F' option throughout a compilation
385     toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and
386     output object files.  The GNU linker uses other mechanisms for
387     this purpose: the `-b', `--format', `--oformat' options, the
388     `TARGET' command in linker scripts, and the `GNUTARGET'
389     environment variable.  The GNU linker will ignore the `-F' option
390     when not creating an ELF shared object.
391
392`-fini=NAME'
393     When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
394     the executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to
395     the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_fini'
396     as the function to call.
397
398`-g'
399     Ignored.  Provided for compatibility with other tools.
400
401`-G VALUE'
402`--gpsize=VALUE'
403     Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP
404     register to SIZE.  This is only meaningful for object file formats
405     such as MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects
406     into different sections.  This is ignored for other object file
407     formats.
408
409`-h NAME'
410`-soname=NAME'
411     When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME
412     field to the specified name.  When an executable is linked with a
413     shared object which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the
414     executable is run the dynamic linker will attempt to load the
415     shared object specified by the DT_SONAME field rather than the
416     using the file name given to the linker.
417
418`-i'
419     Perform an incremental link (same as option `-r').
420
421`-init=NAME'
422     When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
423     the executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to
424     the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_init'
425     as the function to call.
426
427`-l NAMESPEC'
428`--library=NAMESPEC'
429     Add the archive or object file specified by NAMESPEC to the list
430     of files to link.  This option may be used any number of times.
431     If NAMESPEC is of the form `:FILENAME', `ld' will search the
432     library path for a file called FILENAME, otherwise it will search
433     the library path for a file called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
434
435     On systems which support shared libraries, `ld' may also search for
436     files other than `libNAMESPEC.a'.  Specifically, on ELF and SunOS
437     systems, `ld' will search a directory for a library called
438     `libNAMESPEC.so' before searching for one called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
439     (By convention, a `.so' extension indicates a shared library.)
440     Note that this behavior does not apply to `:FILENAME', which
441     always specifies a file called FILENAME.
442
443     The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where
444     it is specified on the command line.  If the archive defines a
445     symbol which was undefined in some object which appeared before
446     the archive on the command line, the linker will include the
447     appropriate file(s) from the archive.  However, an undefined
448     symbol in an object appearing later on the command line will not
449     cause the linker to search the archive again.
450
451     See the `-(' option for a way to force the linker to search
452     archives multiple times.
453
454     You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
455
456     This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.
457     However, if you are using `ld' on AIX, note that it is different
458     from the behaviour of the AIX linker.
459
460`-L SEARCHDIR'
461`--library-path=SEARCHDIR'
462     Add path SEARCHDIR to the list of paths that `ld' will search for
463     archive libraries and `ld' control scripts.  You may use this
464     option any number of times.  The directories are searched in the
465     order in which they are specified on the command line.
466     Directories specified on the command line are searched before the
467     default directories.  All `-L' options apply to all `-l' options,
468     regardless of the order in which the options appear.  `-L' options
469     do not affect how `ld' searches for a linker script unless `-T'
470     option is specified.
471
472     If SEARCHDIR begins with `=', then the `=' will be replaced by the
473     "sysroot prefix", a path specified when the linker is configured.
474
475     The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
476     `-L') depends on which emulation mode `ld' is using, and in some
477     cases also on how it was configured.  *Note Environment::.
478
479     The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
480     `SEARCH_DIR' command.  Directories specified this way are searched
481     at the point in which the linker script appears in the command
482     line.
483
484`-m EMULATION'
485     Emulate the EMULATION linker.  You can list the available
486     emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.
487
488     If the `-m' option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
489     `LDEMULATION' environment variable, if that is defined.
490
491     Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
492     configured.
493
494`-M'
495`--print-map'
496     Print a link map to the standard output.  A link map provides
497     information about the link, including the following:
498
499        * Where object files are mapped into memory.
500
501        * How common symbols are allocated.
502
503        * All archive members included in the link, with a mention of
504          the symbol which caused the archive member to be brought in.
505
506        * The values assigned to symbols.
507
508          Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression
509          which involves a reference to a previous value of the same
510          symbol may not have correct result displayed in the link map.
511          This is because the linker discards intermediate results and
512          only retains the final value of an expression.  Under such
513          circumstances the linker will display the final value
514          enclosed by square brackets.  Thus for example a linker
515          script containing:
516
517                  foo = 1
518                  foo = foo * 4
519                  foo = foo + 8
520
521          will produce the following output in the link map if the `-M'
522          option is used:
523
524                  0x00000001                foo = 0x1
525                  [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo * 0x4)
526                  [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo + 0x8)
527
528          See *note Expressions:: for more information about
529          expressions in linker scripts.
530
531`-n'
532`--nmagic'
533     Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against
534     shared libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic
535     numbers, mark the output as `NMAGIC'.
536
537`-N'
538`--omagic'
539     Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable.  Also,
540     do not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against
541     shared libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic
542     numbers, mark the output as `OMAGIC'. Note: Although a writable
543     text section is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform
544     to the format specification published by Microsoft.
545
546`--no-omagic'
547     This option negates most of the effects of the `-N' option.  It
548     sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment
549     to be page-aligned.  Note - this option does not enable linking
550     against shared libraries.  Use `-Bdynamic' for this.
551
552`-o OUTPUT'
553`--output=OUTPUT'
554     Use OUTPUT as the name for the program produced by `ld'; if this
555     option is not specified, the name `a.out' is used by default.  The
556     script command `OUTPUT' can also specify the output file name.
557
558`-O LEVEL'
559     If LEVEL is a numeric values greater than zero `ld' optimizes the
560     output.  This might take significantly longer and therefore
561     probably should only be enabled for the final binary.  At the
562     moment this option only affects ELF shared library generation.
563     Future releases of the linker may make more use of this option.
564     Also currently there is no difference in the linker's behaviour
565     for different non-zero values of this option.  Again this may
566     change with future releases.
567
568`-q'
569`--emit-relocs'
570     Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
571     Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this
572     information in order to perform correct modifications of
573     executables.  This results in larger executables.
574
575     This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
576
577`--force-dynamic'
578     Force the output file to have dynamic sections.  This option is
579     specific to VxWorks targets.
580
581`-r'
582`--relocatable'
583     Generate relocatable output--i.e., generate an output file that
584     can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  This is often called "partial
585     linking".  As a side effect, in environments that support standard
586     Unix magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic
587     number to `OMAGIC'.  If this option is not specified, an absolute
588     file is produced.  When linking C++ programs, this option _will
589     not_ resolve references to constructors; to do that, use `-Ur'.
590
591     When an input file does not have the same format as the output
592     file, partial linking is only supported if that input file does
593     not contain any relocations.  Different output formats can have
594     further restrictions; for example some `a.out'-based formats do
595     not support partial linking with input files in other formats at
596     all.
597
598     This option does the same thing as `-i'.
599
600`-R FILENAME'
601`--just-symbols=FILENAME'
602     Read symbol names and their addresses from FILENAME, but do not
603     relocate it or include it in the output.  This allows your output
604     file to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined
605     in other programs.  You may use this option more than once.
606
607     For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
608     followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
609     treated as the `-rpath' option.
610
611`-s'
612`--strip-all'
613     Omit all symbol information from the output file.
614
615`-S'
616`--strip-debug'
617     Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the
618     output file.
619
620`-t'
621`--trace'
622     Print the names of the input files as `ld' processes them.
623
624`-T SCRIPTFILE'
625`--script=SCRIPTFILE'
626     Use SCRIPTFILE as the linker script.  This script replaces `ld''s
627     default linker script (rather than adding to it), so COMMANDFILE
628     must specify everything necessary to describe the output file.
629     *Note Scripts::.  If SCRIPTFILE does not exist in the current
630     directory, `ld' looks for it in the directories specified by any
631     preceding `-L' options.  Multiple `-T' options accumulate.
632
633`-dT SCRIPTFILE'
634`--default-script=SCRIPTFILE'
635     Use SCRIPTFILE as the default linker script.  *Note Scripts::.
636
637     This option is similar to the `--script' option except that
638     processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
639     command line has been processed.  This allows options placed after
640     the `--default-script' option on the command line to affect the
641     behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the
642     linker command line cannot be directly controlled by the user.
643     (eg because the command line is being constructed by another tool,
644     such as `gcc').
645
646`-u SYMBOL'
647`--undefined=SYMBOL'
648     Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
649     symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
650     modules from standard libraries.  `-u' may be repeated with
651     different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.
652     This option is equivalent to the `EXTERN' linker script command.
653
654`-Ur'
655     For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
656     `-r': it generates relocatable output--i.e., an output file that
657     can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  When linking C++ programs,
658     `-Ur' _does_ resolve references to constructors, unlike `-r'.  It
659     does not work to use `-Ur' on files that were themselves linked
660     with `-Ur'; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
661     be added to.  Use `-Ur' only for the last partial link, and `-r'
662     for the others.
663
664`--unique[=SECTION]'
665     Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
666     SECTION, or if the optional wildcard SECTION argument is missing,
667     for every orphan input section.  An orphan section is one not
668     specifically mentioned in a linker script.  You may use this option
669     multiple times on the command line;  It prevents the normal
670     merging of input sections with the same name, overriding output
671     section assignments in a linker script.
672
673`-v'
674`--version'
675`-V'
676     Display the version number for `ld'.  The `-V' option also lists
677     the supported emulations.
678
679`-x'
680`--discard-all'
681     Delete all local symbols.
682
683`-X'
684`--discard-locals'
685     Delete all temporary local symbols.  (These symbols start with
686     system-specific local label prefixes, typically `.L' for ELF
687     systems or `L' for traditional a.out systems.)
688
689`-y SYMBOL'
690`--trace-symbol=SYMBOL'
691     Print the name of each linked file in which SYMBOL appears.  This
692     option may be given any number of times.  On many systems it is
693     necessary to prepend an underscore.
694
695     This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your
696     link but don't know where the reference is coming from.
697
698`-Y PATH'
699     Add PATH to the default library search path.  This option exists
700     for Solaris compatibility.
701
702`-z KEYWORD'
703     The recognized keywords are:
704    `combreloc'
705          Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make
706          dynamic symbol lookup caching possible.
707
708    `defs'
709          Disallows undefined symbols in object files.  Undefined
710          symbols in shared libraries are still allowed.
711
712    `execstack'
713          Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
714
715    `initfirst'
716          This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
717          It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will
718          occur before the runtime initialization of any other objects
719          brought into the process at the same time.  Similarly the
720          runtime finalization of the object will occur after the
721          runtime finalization of any other objects.
722
723    `interpose'
724          Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all
725          symbols but the primary executable.
726
727    `lazy'
728          When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
729          tell the dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to
730          the point when the function is called (lazy binding), rather
731          than at load time.  Lazy binding is the default.
732
733    `loadfltr'
734          Marks  the object that its filters be processed immediately at
735          runtime.
736
737    `muldefs'
738          Allows multiple definitions.
739
740    `nocombreloc'
741          Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
742
743    `nocopyreloc'
744          Disables production of copy relocs.
745
746    `nodefaultlib'
747          Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this
748          object will ignore any default library search paths.
749
750    `nodelete'
751          Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
752
753    `nodlopen'
754          Marks the object not available to `dlopen'.
755
756    `nodump'
757          Marks the object can not be dumped by `dldump'.
758
759    `noexecstack'
760          Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
761
762    `norelro'
763          Don't create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the
764          object.
765
766    `now'
767          When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
768          tell the dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the
769          program is started, or when the shared library is linked to
770          using dlopen, instead of deferring function call resolution
771          to the point when the function is first called.
772
773    `origin'
774          Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
775
776    `relro'
777          Create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the object.
778
779    `max-page-size=VALUE'
780          Set the emulation maximum page size to VALUE.
781
782    `common-page-size=VALUE'
783          Set the emulation common page size to VALUE.
784
785
786     Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
787
788`-( ARCHIVES -)'
789`--start-group ARCHIVES --end-group'
790     The ARCHIVES should be a list of archive files.  They may be
791     either explicit file names, or `-l' options.
792
793     The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new
794     undefined references are created.  Normally, an archive is
795     searched only once in the order that it is specified on the
796     command line.  If a symbol in that archive is needed to resolve an
797     undefined symbol referred to by an object in an archive that
798     appears later on the command line, the linker would not be able to
799     resolve that reference.  By grouping the archives, they all be
800     searched repeatedly until all possible references are resolved.
801
802     Using this option has a significant performance cost.  It is best
803     to use it only when there are unavoidable circular references
804     between two or more archives.
805
806`--accept-unknown-input-arch'
807`--no-accept-unknown-input-arch'
808     Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
809     recognised.  The assumption is that the user knows what they are
810     doing and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.
811     This was the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14.
812     The default behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such
813     input files, and so the `--accept-unknown-input-arch' option has
814     been added to restore the old behaviour.
815
816`--as-needed'
817`--no-as-needed'
818     This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries
819     mentioned on the command line after the `--as-needed' option.
820     Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic
821     library mentioned on the command line, regardless of whether the
822     library is actually needed or not.  `--as-needed' causes a
823     DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted for a library that satisfies an
824     undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if the
825     library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
826     linked up to that point, an undefined symbol reference from
827     another dynamic library.  `--no-as-needed' restores the default
828     behaviour.
829
830`--add-needed'
831`--no-add-needed'
832     These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
833     their names to the `--as-needed' and `--no-as-needed' options.
834     They have been replaced by `--copy-dt-needed-entries' and
835     `--no-copy-dt-needed-entries'.
836
837`-assert KEYWORD'
838     This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
839
840`-Bdynamic'
841`-dy'
842`-call_shared'
843     Link against dynamic libraries.  This is only meaningful on
844     platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  This option
845     is normally the default on such platforms.  The different variants
846     of this option are for compatibility with various systems.  You
847     may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
848     library searching for `-l' options which follow it.
849
850`-Bgroup'
851     Set the `DF_1_GROUP' flag in the `DT_FLAGS_1' entry in the dynamic
852     section.  This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
853     object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
854     `--unresolved-symbols=report-all' is implied.  This option is only
855     meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
856
857`-Bstatic'
858`-dn'
859`-non_shared'
860`-static'
861     Do not link against shared libraries.  This is only meaningful on
862     platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  The different
863     variants of this option are for compatibility with various
864     systems.  You may use this option multiple times on the command
865     line: it affects library searching for `-l' options which follow
866     it.  This option also implies `--unresolved-symbols=report-all'.
867     This option can be used with `-shared'.  Doing so means that a
868     shared library is being created but that all of the library's
869     external references must be resolved by pulling in entries from
870     static libraries.
871
872`-Bsymbolic'
873     When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols
874     to the definition within the shared library, if any.  Normally, it
875     is possible for a program linked against a shared library to
876     override the definition within the shared library.  This option is
877     only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
878
879`-Bsymbolic-functions'
880     When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
881     symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.  This
882     option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
883     libraries.
884
885`--dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE'
886     Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker.  This is
887     typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
888     global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the
889     definition within the shared library, or creating dynamically
890     linked executables to specify a list of symbols which should be
891     added to the symbol table in the executable.  This option is only
892     meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
893
894     The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node
895     without scope and node name.  See *note VERSION:: for more
896     information.
897
898`--dynamic-list-data'
899     Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
900
901`--dynamic-list-cpp-new'
902     Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete.
903     It is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
904
905`--dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo'
906     Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type
907     identification.
908
909`--check-sections'
910`--no-check-sections'
911     Asks the linker _not_ to check section addresses after they have
912     been assigned to see if there are any overlaps.  Normally the
913     linker will perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it
914     will produce suitable error messages.  The linker does know about,
915     and does make allowances for sections in overlays.  The default
916     behaviour can be restored by using the command line switch
917     `--check-sections'.  Section overlap is not usually checked for
918     relocatable links.  You can force checking in that case by using
919     the `--check-sections' option.
920
921`--copy-dt-needed-entries'
922`--no-copy-dt-needed-entries'
923     This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
924     by DT_NEEDED tags _inside_ ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
925     command line.  Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
926     output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
927     input dynamic library.  With `--copy-dt-needed-entries' specified
928     on the command line however any dynamic libraries that follow it
929     will have their DT_NEEDED entries added.  The default behaviour
930     can be restored with `--no-copy-dt-needed-entries'.
931
932     This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in
933     dynamic libraries.  With `--copy-dt-needed-entries' dynamic
934     libraries mentioned on the command line will be recursively
935     searched, following their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in
936     order to resolve symbols required by the output binary.  With the
937     default setting however the searching of dynamic libraries that
938     follow it will stop with the dynamic library itself.  No DT_NEEDED
939     links will be traversed to resolve symbols.
940
941`--cref'
942     Output a cross reference table.  If a linker map file is being
943     generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
944     Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
945
946     The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
947     easily processed by a script if necessary.  The symbols are
948     printed out, sorted by name.  For each symbol, a list of file
949     names is given.  If the symbol is defined, the first file listed
950     is the location of the definition.  The remaining files contain
951     references to the symbol.
952
953`--no-define-common'
954     This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
955     The script command `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same effect.
956     *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
957
958     The `--no-define-common' option allows decoupling the decision to
959     assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice of the output
960     file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type forces
961     assigning addresses to Common symbols.  Using `--no-define-common'
962     allows Common symbols that are referenced from a shared library to
963     be assigned addresses only in the main program.  This eliminates
964     the unused duplicate space in the shared library, and also
965     prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
966     duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized
967     search paths for runtime symbol resolution.
968
969`--defsym=SYMBOL=EXPRESSION'
970     Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
971     address given by EXPRESSION.  You may use this option as many
972     times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.
973     A limited form of arithmetic is supported for the EXPRESSION in
974     this context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of
975     an existing symbol, or use `+' and `-' to add or subtract
976     hexadecimal constants or symbols.  If you need more elaborate
977     expressions, consider using the linker command language from a
978     script (*note Assignment: Symbol Definitions: Assignments.).
979     _Note:_ there should be no white space between SYMBOL, the equals
980     sign ("<=>"), and EXPRESSION.
981
982`--demangle[=STYLE]'
983`--no-demangle'
984     These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error
985     messages and other output.  When the linker is told to demangle,
986     it tries to present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips
987     leading underscores if they are used by the object file format,
988     and converts C++ mangled symbol names into user readable names.
989     Different compilers have different mangling styles.  The optional
990     demangling style argument can be used to choose an appropriate
991     demangling style for your compiler.  The linker will demangle by
992     default unless the environment variable `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is
993     set.  These options may be used to override the default.
994
995`-IFILE'
996`--dynamic-linker=FILE'
997     Set the name of the dynamic linker.  This is only meaningful when
998     generating dynamically linked ELF executables.  The default dynamic
999     linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what
1000     you are doing.
1001
1002`--fatal-warnings'
1003`--no-fatal-warnings'
1004     Treat all warnings as errors.  The default behaviour can be
1005     restored with the option `--no-fatal-warnings'.
1006
1007`--force-exe-suffix'
1008     Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1009
1010     If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1011     `.exe' or `.dll' suffix, this option forces the linker to copy the
1012     output file to one of the same name with a `.exe' suffix. This
1013     option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a
1014     Microsoft Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run
1015     an image unless it ends in a `.exe' suffix.
1016
1017`--gc-sections'
1018`--no-gc-sections'
1019     Enable garbage collection of unused input sections.  It is ignored
1020     on targets that do not support this option.  The default behaviour
1021     (of not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by
1022     specifying `--no-gc-sections' on the command line.
1023
1024     `--gc-sections' decides which input sections are used by examining
1025     symbols and relocations.  The section containing the entry symbol
1026     and all sections containing symbols undefined on the command-line
1027     will be kept, as will sections containing symbols referenced by
1028     dynamic objects.  Note that when building shared libraries, the
1029     linker must assume that any visible symbol is referenced.  Once
1030     this initial set of sections has been determined, the linker
1031     recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1032     relocations.  See `--entry' and `--undefined'.
1033
1034     This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with
1035     option `-r').  In this case the root of symbols kept must be
1036     explicitly specified either by an `--entry' or `--undefined'
1037     option or by a `ENTRY' command in the linker script.
1038
1039`--print-gc-sections'
1040`--no-print-gc-sections'
1041     List all sections removed by garbage collection.  The listing is
1042     printed on stderr.  This option is only effective if garbage
1043     collection has been enabled via the `--gc-sections') option.  The
1044     default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed)
1045     can be restored by specifying `--no-print-gc-sections' on the
1046     command line.
1047
1048`--print-output-format'
1049     Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1050     other command-line options).  This is the string that would appear
1051     in an `OUTPUT_FORMAT' linker script command (*note File
1052     Commands::).
1053
1054`--help'
1055     Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output
1056     and exit.
1057
1058`--target-help'
1059     Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard
1060     output and exit.
1061
1062`-Map=MAPFILE'
1063     Print a link map to the file MAPFILE.  See the description of the
1064     `-M' option, above.
1065
1066`--no-keep-memory'
1067     `ld' normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1068     symbol tables of input files in memory.  This option tells `ld' to
1069     instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables
1070     as necessary.  This may be required if `ld' runs out of memory
1071     space while linking a large executable.
1072
1073`--no-undefined'
1074`-z defs'
1075     Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.
1076     This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared
1077     library.  The switch `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' controls the
1078     behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1079     libraries being linked in.
1080
1081`--allow-multiple-definition'
1082`-z muldefs'
1083     Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1084     report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and
1085     the first definition will be used.
1086
1087`--allow-shlib-undefined'
1088`--no-allow-shlib-undefined'
1089     Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.  This
1090     switch is similar to `--no-undefined' except that it determines
1091     the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a shared library
1092     rather than a regular object file.  It does not affect how
1093     undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1094
1095     The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1096     referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to
1097     create an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being
1098     used to create a shared library.
1099
1100     The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1101     libraries specified at link time are that:
1102
1103        * A shared library specified at link time may not be the same
1104          as the one that is available at load time, so the symbol
1105          might actually be resolvable at load time.
1106
1107        * There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where
1108          undefined symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1109
1110          The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load
1111          time to select whichever function is most appropriate for the
1112          current architecture.  This is used, for example, to
1113          dynamically select an appropriate memset function.
1114
1115`--no-undefined-version'
1116     Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will
1117     ignore it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version
1118     and a fatal error will be issued instead.
1119
1120`--default-symver'
1121     Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
1122     unversioned exported symbols.
1123
1124`--default-imported-symver'
1125     Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
1126     unversioned imported symbols.
1127
1128`--no-warn-mismatch'
1129     Normally `ld' will give an error if you try to link together input
1130     files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they
1131     have been compiled for different processors or for different
1132     endiannesses.  This option tells `ld' that it should silently
1133     permit such possible errors.  This option should only be used with
1134     care, in cases when you have taken some special action that
1135     ensures that the linker errors are inappropriate.
1136
1137`--no-warn-search-mismatch'
1138     Normally `ld' will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1139     library during a library search.  This option silences the warning.
1140
1141`--no-whole-archive'
1142     Turn off the effect of the `--whole-archive' option for subsequent
1143     archive files.
1144
1145`--noinhibit-exec'
1146     Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1147     Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it
1148     encounters errors during the link process; it exits without
1149     writing an output file when it issues any error whatsoever.
1150
1151`-nostdlib'
1152     Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1153     command line.  Library directories specified in linker scripts
1154     (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are
1155     ignored.
1156
1157`--oformat=OUTPUT-FORMAT'
1158     `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1159     file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the
1160     `--oformat' option to specify the binary format for the output
1161     object file.  Even when `ld' is configured to support alternative
1162     object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as `ld'
1163     should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1164     usual format on each machine.  OUTPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the
1165     name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You
1166     can list the available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  The
1167     script command `OUTPUT_FORMAT' can also specify the output format,
1168     but this option overrides it.  *Note BFD::.
1169
1170`-pie'
1171`--pic-executable'
1172     Create a position independent executable.  This is currently only
1173     supported on ELF platforms.  Position independent executables are
1174     similar to shared libraries in that they are relocated by the
1175     dynamic linker to the virtual address the OS chooses for them
1176     (which can vary between invocations).  Like normal dynamically
1177     linked executables they can be executed and symbols defined in the
1178     executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1179
1180`-qmagic'
1181     This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1182
1183`-Qy'
1184     This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1185
1186`--relax'
1187`--no-relax'
1188     An option with machine dependent effects.  This option is only
1189     supported on a few targets.  *Note `ld' and the H8/300: H8/300.
1190     *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family: i960.  *Note `ld' and Xtensa
1191     Processors: Xtensa.  *Note `ld' and the 68HC11 and 68HC12:
1192     M68HC11/68HC12.  *Note `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support:
1193     PowerPC ELF32.
1194
1195     On some platforms the `--relax' option performs target specific,
1196     global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1197     addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1198     synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1199     instructions, and combinig constant values.
1200
1201     On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make
1202     symbolic debugging of the resulting executable impossible.  This
1203     is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1204     family of processors.
1205
1206     On platforms where this is not supported, `--relax' is accepted,
1207     but ignored.
1208
1209     On platforms where `--relax' is accepted the option `--no-relax'
1210     can be used to disable the feature.
1211
1212`--retain-symbols-file=FILENAME'
1213     Retain _only_ the symbols listed in the file FILENAME, discarding
1214     all others.  FILENAME is simply a flat file, with one symbol name
1215     per line.  This option is especially useful in environments (such
1216     as VxWorks) where a large global symbol table is accumulated
1217     gradually, to conserve run-time memory.
1218
1219     `--retain-symbols-file' does _not_ discard undefined symbols, or
1220     symbols needed for relocations.
1221
1222     You may only specify `--retain-symbols-file' once in the command
1223     line.  It overrides `-s' and `-S'.
1224
1225`-rpath=DIR'
1226     Add a directory to the runtime library search path.  This is used
1227     when linking an ELF executable with shared objects.  All `-rpath'
1228     arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which
1229     uses them to locate shared objects at runtime.  The `-rpath'
1230     option is also used when locating shared objects which are needed
1231     by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
1232     description of the `-rpath-link' option.  If `-rpath' is not used
1233     when linking an ELF executable, the contents of the environment
1234     variable `LD_RUN_PATH' will be used if it is defined.
1235
1236     The `-rpath' option may also be used on SunOS.  By default, on
1237     SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1238     `-L' options it is given.  If a `-rpath' option is used, the
1239     runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the `-rpath'
1240     options, ignoring the `-L' options.  This can be useful when using
1241     gcc, which adds many `-L' options which may be on NFS mounted file
1242     systems.
1243
1244     For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
1245     followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
1246     treated as the `-rpath' option.
1247
1248`-rpath-link=DIR'
1249     When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.
1250     This happens when an `ld -shared' link includes a shared library
1251     as one of the input files.
1252
1253     When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a
1254     non-shared, non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to
1255     locate the required shared library and include it in the link, if
1256     it is not included explicitly.  In such a case, the `-rpath-link'
1257     option specifies the first set of directories to search.  The
1258     `-rpath-link' option may specify a sequence of directory names
1259     either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1260     appearing multiple times.
1261
1262     This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search
1263     path that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In
1264     such a case it is possible to use unintentionally a different
1265     search path than the runtime linker would do.
1266
1267     The linker uses the following search paths to locate required
1268     shared libraries:
1269       1. Any directories specified by `-rpath-link' options.
1270
1271       2. Any directories specified by `-rpath' options.  The difference
1272          between `-rpath' and `-rpath-link' is that directories
1273          specified by `-rpath' options are included in the executable
1274          and used at runtime, whereas the `-rpath-link' option is only
1275          effective at link time. Searching `-rpath' in this way is
1276          only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which have
1277          been configured with the `--with-sysroot' option.
1278
1279       3. On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the `-rpath' and
1280          `-rpath-link' options were not used, search the contents of
1281          the environment variable `LD_RUN_PATH'.
1282
1283       4. On SunOS, if the `-rpath' option was not used, search any
1284          directories specified using `-L' options.
1285
1286       5. For a native linker, the search the contents of the
1287          environment variable `LD_LIBRARY_PATH'.
1288
1289       6. For a native ELF linker, the directories in `DT_RUNPATH' or
1290          `DT_RPATH' of a shared library are searched for shared
1291          libraries needed by it. The `DT_RPATH' entries are ignored if
1292          `DT_RUNPATH' entries exist.
1293
1294       7. The default directories, normally `/lib' and `/usr/lib'.
1295
1296       8. For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file
1297          `/etc/ld.so.conf' exists, the list of directories found in
1298          that file.
1299
1300     If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue
1301     a warning and continue with the link.
1302
1303`-shared'
1304`-Bshareable'
1305     Create a shared library.  This is currently only supported on ELF,
1306     XCOFF and SunOS platforms.  On SunOS, the linker will
1307     automatically create a shared library if the `-e' option is not
1308     used and there are undefined symbols in the link.
1309
1310`--sort-common'
1311`--sort-common=ascending'
1312`--sort-common=descending'
1313     This option tells `ld' to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1314     ascending or descending order when it places them in the
1315     appropriate output sections.  The symbol alignments considered are
1316     sixteen-byte or larger, eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and
1317     one-byte. This is to prevent gaps between symbols due to alignment
1318     constraints.  If no sorting order is specified, then descending
1319     order is assumed.
1320
1321`--sort-section=name'
1322     This option will apply `SORT_BY_NAME' to all wildcard section
1323     patterns in the linker script.
1324
1325`--sort-section=alignment'
1326     This option will apply `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' to all wildcard section
1327     patterns in the linker script.
1328
1329`--split-by-file[=SIZE]'
1330     Similar to `--split-by-reloc' but creates a new output section for
1331     each input file when SIZE is reached.  SIZE defaults to a size of
1332     1 if not given.
1333
1334`--split-by-reloc[=COUNT]'
1335     Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no
1336     single output section in the file contains more than COUNT
1337     relocations.  This is useful when generating huge relocatable
1338     files for downloading into certain real time kernels with the COFF
1339     object file format; since COFF cannot represent more than 65535
1340     relocations in a single section.  Note that this will fail to work
1341     with object file formats which do not support arbitrary sections.
1342     The linker will not split up individual input sections for
1343     redistribution, so if a single input section contains more than
1344     COUNT relocations one output section will contain that many
1345     relocations.  COUNT defaults to a value of 32768.
1346
1347`--stats'
1348     Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker,
1349     such as execution time and memory usage.
1350
1351`--sysroot=DIRECTORY'
1352     Use DIRECTORY as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1353     configure-time default.  This option is only supported by linkers
1354     that were configured using `--with-sysroot'.
1355
1356`--traditional-format'
1357     For some targets, the output of `ld' is different in some ways from
1358     the output of some existing linker.  This switch requests `ld' to
1359     use the traditional format instead.
1360
1361     For example, on SunOS, `ld' combines duplicate entries in the
1362     symbol string table.  This can reduce the size of an output file
1363     with full debugging information by over 30 percent.
1364     Unfortunately, the SunOS `dbx' program can not read the resulting
1365     program (`gdb' has no trouble).  The `--traditional-format' switch
1366     tells `ld' to not combine duplicate entries.
1367
1368`--section-start=SECTIONNAME=ORG'
1369     Locate a section in the output file at the absolute address given
1370     by ORG.  You may use this option as many times as necessary to
1371     locate multiple sections in the command line.  ORG must be a
1372     single hexadecimal integer; for compatibility with other linkers,
1373     you may omit the leading `0x' usually associated with hexadecimal
1374     values.  _Note:_ there should be no white space between
1375     SECTIONNAME, the equals sign ("<=>"), and ORG.
1376
1377`-Tbss=ORG'
1378`-Tdata=ORG'
1379`-Ttext=ORG'
1380     Same as `--section-start', with `.bss', `.data' or `.text' as the
1381     SECTIONNAME.
1382
1383`-Ttext-segment=ORG'
1384     When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the
1385     address of the first byte of the text segment.
1386
1387`--unresolved-symbols=METHOD'
1388     Determine how to handle unresolved symbols.  There are four
1389     possible values for `method':
1390
1391    `ignore-all'
1392          Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1393
1394    `report-all'
1395          Report all unresolved symbols.  This is the default.
1396
1397    `ignore-in-object-files'
1398          Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared
1399          libraries, but ignore them if they come from regular object
1400          files.
1401
1402    `ignore-in-shared-libs'
1403          Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object
1404          files, but ignore them if they come from shared libraries.
1405          This can be useful when creating a dynamic binary and it is
1406          known that all the shared libraries that it should be
1407          referencing are included on the linker's command line.
1408
1409     The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be
1410     controlled by the `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' option.
1411
1412     Normally the linker will generate an error message for each
1413     reported unresolved symbol but the option
1414     `--warn-unresolved-symbols' can change this to a warning.
1415
1416`--dll-verbose'
1417`--verbose[=NUMBER]'
1418     Display the version number for `ld' and list the linker emulations
1419     supported.  Display which input files can and cannot be opened.
1420     Display the linker script being used by the linker. If the
1421     optional NUMBER argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be
1422     displayed.
1423
1424`--version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE'
1425     Specify the name of a version script to the linker.  This is
1426     typically used when creating shared libraries to specify
1427     additional information about the version hierarchy for the library
1428     being created.  This option is only fully supported on ELF
1429     platforms which support shared libraries; see *note VERSION::.  It
1430     is partially supported on PE platforms, which can use version
1431     scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1432     symbols marked `local' in the version script will not be exported.
1433     *Note WIN32::.
1434
1435`--warn-common'
1436     Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol
1437     or with a symbol definition.  Unix linkers allow this somewhat
1438     sloppy practise, but linkers on some other operating systems do
1439     not.  This option allows you to find potential problems from
1440     combining global symbols.  Unfortunately, some C libraries use
1441     this practise, so you may get some warnings about symbols in the
1442     libraries as well as in your programs.
1443
1444     There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C
1445     examples:
1446
1447    `int i = 1;'
1448          A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of
1449          the output file.
1450
1451    `extern int i;'
1452          An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.  There
1453          must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1454          variable somewhere.
1455
1456    `int i;'
1457          A common symbol.  If there are only (one or more) common
1458          symbols for a variable, it goes in the uninitialized data
1459          area of the output file.  The linker merges multiple common
1460          symbols for the same variable into a single symbol.  If they
1461          are of different sizes, it picks the largest size.  The
1462          linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1463          a definition of the same variable.
1464
1465     The `--warn-common' option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1466     Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the
1467     symbol just encountered, and the second describes the previous
1468     symbol encountered with the same name.  One or both of the two
1469     symbols will be a common symbol.
1470
1471       1. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is
1472          already a definition for the symbol.
1473               FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
1474                  overridden by definition
1475               FILE(SECTION): warning: defined here
1476
1477       2. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later
1478          definition for the symbol is encountered.  This is the same
1479          as the previous case, except that the symbols are encountered
1480          in a different order.
1481               FILE(SECTION): warning: definition of `SYMBOL'
1482                  overriding common
1483               FILE(SECTION): warning: common is here
1484
1485       3. Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common
1486          symbol.
1487               FILE(SECTION): warning: multiple common
1488                  of `SYMBOL'
1489               FILE(SECTION): warning: previous common is here
1490
1491       4. Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1492               FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
1493                  overridden by larger common
1494               FILE(SECTION): warning: larger common is here
1495
1496       5. Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common
1497          symbol.  This is the same as the previous case, except that
1498          the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1499               FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
1500                  overriding smaller common
1501               FILE(SECTION): warning: smaller common is here
1502
1503`--warn-constructors'
1504     Warn if any global constructors are used.  This is only useful for
1505     a few object file formats.  For formats like COFF or ELF, the
1506     linker can not detect the use of global constructors.
1507
1508`--warn-multiple-gp'
1509     Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output
1510     file.  This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the
1511     Alpha.  Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants
1512     in a special section.  A special register (the global pointer)
1513     points into the middle of this section, so that constants can be
1514     loaded efficiently via a base-register relative addressing mode.
1515     Since the offset in base-register relative mode is fixed and
1516     relatively small (e.g., 16 bits), this limits the maximum size of
1517     the constant pool.  Thus, in large programs, it is often necessary
1518     to use multiple global pointer values in order to be able to
1519     address all possible constants.  This option causes a warning to
1520     be issued whenever this case occurs.
1521
1522`--warn-once'
1523     Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per
1524     module which refers to it.
1525
1526`--warn-section-align'
1527     Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1528     alignment.  Typically, the alignment will be set by an input
1529     section.  The address will only be changed if it not explicitly
1530     specified; that is, if the `SECTIONS' command does not specify a
1531     start address for the section (*note SECTIONS::).
1532
1533`--warn-shared-textrel'
1534     Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
1535
1536`--warn-alternate-em'
1537     Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
1538
1539`--warn-unresolved-symbols'
1540     If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the
1541     option `--unresolved-symbols') it will normally generate an error.
1542     This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1543
1544`--error-unresolved-symbols'
1545     This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors
1546     when it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1547
1548`--whole-archive'
1549     For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
1550     `--whole-archive' option, include every object file in the archive
1551     in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required
1552     object files.  This is normally used to turn an archive file into
1553     a shared library, forcing every object to be included in the
1554     resulting shared library.  This option may be used more than once.
1555
1556     Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
1557     about this option, so you have to use `-Wl,-whole-archive'.
1558     Second, don't forget to use `-Wl,-no-whole-archive' after your
1559     list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1560     your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1561
1562`--wrap=SYMBOL'
1563     Use a wrapper function for SYMBOL.  Any undefined reference to
1564     SYMBOL will be resolved to `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  Any undefined
1565     reference to `__real_SYMBOL' will be resolved to SYMBOL.
1566
1567     This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function.  The
1568     wrapper function should be called `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  If it wishes
1569     to call the system function, it should call `__real_SYMBOL'.
1570
1571     Here is a trivial example:
1572
1573          void *
1574          __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
1575          {
1576            printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
1577            return __real_malloc (c);
1578          }
1579
1580     If you link other code with this file using `--wrap malloc', then
1581     all calls to `malloc' will call the function `__wrap_malloc'
1582     instead.  The call to `__real_malloc' in `__wrap_malloc' will call
1583     the real `malloc' function.
1584
1585     You may wish to provide a `__real_malloc' function as well, so that
1586     links without the `--wrap' option will succeed.  If you do this,
1587     you should not put the definition of `__real_malloc' in the same
1588     file as `__wrap_malloc'; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
1589     call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to `malloc'.
1590
1591`--eh-frame-hdr'
1592     Request creation of `.eh_frame_hdr' section and ELF
1593     `PT_GNU_EH_FRAME' segment header.
1594
1595`--no-ld-generated-unwind-info'
1596     Request creation of `.eh_frame' unwind info for linker generated
1597     code sections like PLT.  This option is on by default if linker
1598     generated unwind info is supported.
1599
1600`--enable-new-dtags'
1601`--disable-new-dtags'
1602     This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older
1603     ELF systems may not understand them. If you specify
1604     `--enable-new-dtags', the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
1605     If you specify `--disable-new-dtags', no new dynamic tags will be
1606     created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note
1607     that those options are only available for ELF systems.
1608
1609`--hash-size=NUMBER'
1610     Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
1611     close to NUMBER.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of
1612     time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
1613     increasing the linker's memory requirements.  Similarly reducing
1614     this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of
1615     speed.
1616
1617`--hash-style=STYLE'
1618     Set the type of linker's hash table(s).  STYLE can be either
1619     `sysv' for classic ELF `.hash' section, `gnu' for new style GNU
1620     `.gnu.hash' section or `both' for both the classic ELF `.hash' and
1621     new style GNU `.gnu.hash' hash tables.  The default is `sysv'.
1622
1623`--reduce-memory-overheads'
1624     This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the
1625     expense of linking speed.  This was introduced to select the old
1626     O(n^2) algorithm for link map file generation, rather than the new
1627     O(n) algorithm which uses about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
1628
1629     Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size
1630     to 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the
1631     linker's run time.  This is not done however if the `--hash-size'
1632     switch has been used.
1633
1634     The `--reduce-memory-overheads' switch may be also be used to
1635     enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
1636
1637`--build-id'
1638`--build-id=STYLE'
1639     Request creation of `.note.gnu.build-id' ELF note section.  The
1640     contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked file.
1641     STYLE can be `uuid' to use 128 random bits, `sha1' to use a
1642     160-bit SHA1 hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
1643     `md5' to use a 128-bit MD5 hash on the normative parts of the
1644     output contents, or `0xHEXSTRING' to use a chosen bit string
1645     specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (`-' and `:'
1646     characters between digit pairs are ignored).  If STYLE is omitted,
1647     `sha1' is used.
1648
1649     The `md5' and `sha1' styles produces an identifier that is always
1650     the same in an identical output file, but will be unique among all
1651     nonidentical output files.  It is not intended to be compared as a
1652     checksum for the file's contents.  A linked file may be changed
1653     later by other tools, but the build ID bit string identifying the
1654     original linked file does not change.
1655
1656     Passing `none' for STYLE disables the setting from any
1657     `--build-id' options earlier on the command line.
1658
1659`--no-poison-system-directories'
1660     Do not warn for `-L' options using system directories such as
1661     `/usr/lib' when cross linking.  This option is intended for use in
1662     chroot environments when such directories contain the correct
1663     libraries for the target system rather than the host.
1664
1665`--error-poison-system-directories'
1666     Give an error instead of a warning for `-L' options using system
1667     directories when cross linking.
1668
16692.1.1 Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
1670-----------------------------------------
1671
1672The i386 PE linker supports the `-shared' option, which causes the
1673output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a normal
1674executable.  You should name the output `*.dll' when you use this
1675option.  In addition, the linker fully supports the standard `*.def'
1676files, which may be specified on the linker command line like an object
1677file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports symbols from, to
1678ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal object file).
1679
1680   In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
1681support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
1682PE target.  Options that take values may be separated from their values
1683by either a space or an equals sign.
1684
1685`--add-stdcall-alias'
1686     If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@NN) will be exported
1687     as-is and also with the suffix stripped.  [This option is specific
1688     to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1689
1690`--base-file FILE'
1691     Use FILE as the name of a file in which to save the base addresses
1692     of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with `dlltool'.
1693     [This is an i386 PE specific option]
1694
1695`--dll'
1696     Create a DLL instead of a regular executable.  You may also use
1697     `-shared' or specify a `LIBRARY' in a given `.def' file.  [This
1698     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1699
1700`--enable-long-section-names'
1701`--disable-long-section-names'
1702     The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that
1703     permits the use of section names longer than eight characters, the
1704     normal limit for Coff.  By default, these names are only allowed
1705     in object files, as fully-linked executable images do not carry
1706     the Coff string table required to support the longer names.  As a
1707     GNU extension, it is possible to allow their use in executable
1708     images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)  disallow it in
1709     object files, by using these two options.  Executable images
1710     generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard,
1711     carrying as they do a string table, and may generate confusing
1712     output when examined with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file
1713     viewers and dumpers.  However, GDB relies on the use of PE long
1714     section names to find Dwarf-2 debug information sections in an
1715     executable image at runtime, and so if neither option is specified
1716     on the command-line, `ld' will enable long section names,
1717     overriding the default and technically correct behaviour, when it
1718     finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
1719     image and not stripping symbols.  [This option is valid for all PE
1720     targeted ports of the linker]
1721
1722`--enable-stdcall-fixup'
1723`--disable-stdcall-fixup'
1724     If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt
1725     to do "fuzzy linking" by looking for another defined symbol that
1726     differs only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall)
1727     and will resolve that symbol by linking to the match.  For
1728     example, the undefined symbol `_foo' might be linked to the
1729     function `_foo@12', or the undefined symbol `_bar@16' might be
1730     linked to the function `_bar'.  When the linker does this, it
1731     prints a warning, since it normally should have failed to link,
1732     but sometimes import libraries generated from third-party dlls may
1733     need this feature to be usable.  If you specify
1734     `--enable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is fully enabled and
1735     warnings are not printed.  If you specify
1736     `--disable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is disabled and such
1737     mismatches are considered to be errors.  [This option is specific
1738     to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1739
1740`--leading-underscore'
1741`--no-leading-underscore'
1742     For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is
1743     defined in target's description. By this option it is possible to
1744     disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
1745
1746`--export-all-symbols'
1747     If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL
1748     will be exported by the DLL.  Note that this is the default if
1749     there otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols.  When symbols are
1750     explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via
1751     function attributes, the default is to not export anything else
1752     unless this option is given.  Note that the symbols `DllMain@12',
1753     `DllEntryPoint@0', `DllMainCRTStartup@12', and `impure_ptr' will
1754     not be automatically exported.  Also, symbols imported from other
1755     DLLs will not be re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the
1756     DLL's internal layout such as those beginning with `_head_' or
1757     ending with `_iname'.  In addition, no symbols from `libgcc',
1758     `libstd++', `libmingw32', or `crtX.o' will be exported.  Symbols
1759     whose names begin with `__rtti_' or `__builtin_' will not be
1760     exported, to help with C++ DLLs.  Finally, there is an extensive
1761     list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported (obviously,
1762     this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).  These
1763     cygwin-excludes are: `_cygwin_dll_entry@12',
1764     `_cygwin_crt0_common@8', `_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@12',
1765     `_fmode', `_impure_ptr', `cygwin_attach_dll', `cygwin_premain0',
1766     `cygwin_premain1', `cygwin_premain2', `cygwin_premain3', and
1767     `environ'.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
1768     of the linker]
1769
1770`--exclude-symbols SYMBOL,SYMBOL,...'
1771     Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
1772     exported.  The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
1773     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1774     linker]
1775
1776`--exclude-all-symbols'
1777     Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.  [This
1778     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1779
1780`--file-alignment'
1781     Specify the file alignment.  Sections in the file will always
1782     begin at file offsets which are multiples of this number.  This
1783     defaults to 512.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted
1784     port of the linker]
1785
1786`--heap RESERVE'
1787`--heap RESERVE,COMMIT'
1788     Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
1789     commit) to be used as heap for this program.  The default is 1Mb
1790     reserved, 4K committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
1791     targeted port of the linker]
1792
1793`--image-base VALUE'
1794     Use VALUE as the base address of your program or dll.  This is the
1795     lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
1796     is loaded.  To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance
1797     of your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not
1798     overlap any other dlls.  The default is 0x400000 for executables,
1799     and 0x10000000 for dlls.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
1800     targeted port of the linker]
1801
1802`--kill-at'
1803     If given, the stdcall suffixes (@NN) will be stripped from symbols
1804     before they are exported.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
1805     targeted port of the linker]
1806
1807`--large-address-aware'
1808     If given, the appropriate bit in the "Characteristics" field of
1809     the COFF header is set to indicate that this executable supports
1810     virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.  This should be used
1811     in conjunction with the /3GB or /USERVA=VALUE megabytes switch in
1812     the "[operating systems]" section of the BOOT.INI.  Otherwise,
1813     this bit has no effect.  [This option is specific to PE targeted
1814     ports of the linker]
1815
1816`--major-image-version VALUE'
1817     Sets the major number of the "image version".  Defaults to 1.
1818     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1819     linker]
1820
1821`--major-os-version VALUE'
1822     Sets the major number of the "os version".  Defaults to 4.  [This
1823     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1824
1825`--major-subsystem-version VALUE'
1826     Sets the major number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 4.
1827     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1828     linker]
1829
1830`--minor-image-version VALUE'
1831     Sets the minor number of the "image version".  Defaults to 0.
1832     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1833     linker]
1834
1835`--minor-os-version VALUE'
1836     Sets the minor number of the "os version".  Defaults to 0.  [This
1837     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1838
1839`--minor-subsystem-version VALUE'
1840     Sets the minor number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 0.
1841     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1842     linker]
1843
1844`--output-def FILE'
1845     The linker will create the file FILE which will contain a DEF file
1846     corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating.  This DEF file
1847     (which should be called `*.def') may be used to create an import
1848     library with `dlltool' or may be used as a reference to
1849     automatically or implicitly exported symbols.  [This option is
1850     specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1851
1852`--out-implib FILE'
1853     The linker will create the file FILE which will contain an import
1854     lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This import
1855     lib (which should be called `*.dll.a' or `*.a' may be used to link
1856     clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour makes it
1857     possible to skip a separate `dlltool' import library creation step.
1858     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1859     linker]
1860
1861`--enable-auto-image-base'
1862     Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is
1863     specified using the `--image-base' argument.  By using a hash
1864     generated from the dllname to create unique image bases for each
1865     DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
1866     execution are avoided.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
1867     targeted port of the linker]
1868
1869`--disable-auto-image-base'
1870     Do not automatically generate a unique image base.  If there is no
1871     user-specified image base (`--image-base') then use the platform
1872     default.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
1873     the linker]
1874
1875`--dll-search-prefix STRING'
1876     When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
1877     search for `<string><basename>.dll' in preference to
1878     `lib<basename>.dll'. This behaviour allows easy distinction
1879     between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
1880     uwin, pw, etc.  For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
1881     `--dll-search-prefix=cyg'.  [This option is specific to the i386
1882     PE targeted port of the linker]
1883
1884`--enable-auto-import'
1885     Do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to `__imp__symbol' for DATA
1886     imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
1887     building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use
1888     of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the
1889     image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
1890     PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
1891
1892     Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
1893     data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
1894     placed into the .data section instead.  This is in order to work
1895     around a problem with consts that is described here:
1896     http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
1897
1898     Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' - but sometimes you
1899     may see this message:
1900
1901     "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
1902     documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
1903
1904     This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
1905     ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables
1906     only allow one).  Instances where this may occur include accesses
1907     to member fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well
1908     as using a constant index into an array variable imported from a
1909     DLL.  Any multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may
1910     trigger this error condition.  However, regardless of the exact
1911     data type of the offending exported variable, ld will always
1912     detect it, issue the warning, and exit.
1913
1914     There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of
1915     the data type of the exported variable:
1916
1917     One way is to use -enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves
1918     the task of adjusting references in your client code for runtime
1919     environment, so this method works only when runtime environment
1920     supports this feature.
1921
1922     A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a
1923     variable - that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.
1924     For arrays, there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the
1925     array's address) a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a
1926     variable.  Thus:
1927
1928          extern type extern_array[];
1929          extern_array[1] -->
1930             { volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] }
1931
1932     or
1933
1934          extern type extern_array[];
1935          extern_array[1] -->
1936             { volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] }
1937
1938     For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
1939     is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...)
1940     variable:
1941
1942          extern struct s extern_struct;
1943          extern_struct.field -->
1944             { volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field }
1945
1946     or
1947
1948          extern long long extern_ll;
1949          extern_ll -->
1950            { volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll }
1951
1952     A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
1953     'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
1954     `__declspec(dllimport)'.  However, in practise that requires using
1955     compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are building a DLL,
1956     building client code that will link to the DLL, or merely
1957     building/linking to a static library.   In making the choice
1958     between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
1959     constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world
1960     usage:
1961
1962     Original:
1963          --foo.h
1964          extern int arr[];
1965          --foo.c
1966          #include "foo.h"
1967          void main(int argc, char **argv){
1968            printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
1969          }
1970
1971     Solution 1:
1972          --foo.h
1973          extern int arr[];
1974          --foo.c
1975          #include "foo.h"
1976          void main(int argc, char **argv){
1977            /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
1978            volatile int *parr = arr;
1979            printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
1980          }
1981
1982     Solution 2:
1983          --foo.h
1984          /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
1985          #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
1986            !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
1987          #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
1988          #else
1989          #define FOO_IMPORT
1990          #endif
1991          extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
1992          --foo.c
1993          #include "foo.h"
1994          void main(int argc, char **argv){
1995            printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
1996          }
1997
1998     A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your library to
1999     use a functional interface rather than a data interface for the
2000     offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2001     functions).  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
2002     of the linker]
2003
2004`--disable-auto-import'
2005     Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to
2006     `__imp__symbol' for DATA imports from DLLs.  [This option is
2007     specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2008
2009`--enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
2010     If your code contains expressions described in -enable-auto-import
2011     section, that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this
2012     switch will create a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which
2013     can be used by runtime environment to adjust references to such
2014     data in your client code.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
2015     targeted port of the linker]
2016
2017`--disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
2018     Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports
2019     from DLLs.  This is the default.  [This option is specific to the
2020     i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2021
2022`--enable-extra-pe-debug'
2023     Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2024     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
2025     linker]
2026
2027`--section-alignment'
2028     Sets the section alignment.  Sections in memory will always begin
2029     at addresses which are a multiple of this number.  Defaults to
2030     0x1000.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
2031     the linker]
2032
2033`--stack RESERVE'
2034`--stack RESERVE,COMMIT'
2035     Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
2036     commit) to be used as stack for this program.  The default is 2Mb
2037     reserved, 4K committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
2038     targeted port of the linker]
2039
2040`--subsystem WHICH'
2041`--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR'
2042`--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR.MINOR'
2043     Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute.  The
2044     legal values for WHICH are `native', `windows', `console',
2045     `posix', and `xbox'.  You may optionally set the subsystem version
2046     also.  Numeric values are also accepted for WHICH.  [This option
2047     is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2048
2049     The following options set flags in the `DllCharacteristics' field
2050     of the PE file header: [These options are specific to PE targeted
2051     ports of the linker]
2052
2053`--dynamicbase'
2054     The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2055     randomization (ASLR).  This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2056     Vista for i386 PE targets.
2057
2058`--forceinteg'
2059     Code integrity checks are enforced.
2060
2061`--nxcompat'
2062     The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.  This
2063     feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2064
2065`--no-isolation'
2066     Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2067
2068`--no-seh'
2069     The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from this
2070     image.
2071
2072`--no-bind'
2073     Do not bind this image.
2074
2075`--wdmdriver'
2076     The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2077
2078`--tsaware'
2079     The image is Terminal Server aware.
2080
2081
20822.1.2 Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2083---------------------------------------------
2084
2085The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support
2086shared libraries.  Each shared library in the system needs to have a
2087unique index; all executables use an index of 0.
2088
2089`--dsbt-size SIZE'
2090     This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current
2091     executable or shared library to SIZE.  The default is to create a
2092     table with 64 entries.
2093
2094`--dsbt-index INDEX'
2095     This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or
2096     shared library to INDEX.  The default is 0, which is appropriate
2097     for generating executables.  If a shared library is generated with
2098     a DSBT index of 0, the `R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX' relocs are copied into
2099     the output file.
2100
2101     The `--no-merge-exidx-entries' switch disables the merging of
2102     adjacent exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2103
2104
21052.1.3 Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2106------------------------------------------------------------
2107
2108The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2109memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2110
2111`--no-trampoline'
2112     This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a
2113     trampoline is generated for each far function which is called
2114     using a `jsr' instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far
2115     function is taken).
2116
2117`--bank-window NAME'
2118     This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region
2119     in the `MEMORY' specification that describes the memory bank
2120     window.  The definition of such region is then used by the linker
2121     to compute paging and addresses within the memory window.
2122
2123
21242.1.4 Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2125---------------------------------------------
2126
2127The following options are supported to control handling of GOT
2128generation when linking for 68K targets.
2129
2130`--got=TYPE'
2131     This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2132     TYPE should be one of `single', `negative', `multigot' or
2133     `target'.  For more information refer to the Info entry for `ld'.
2134
2135
21362.1.5 Options specific to MIPS targets
2137--------------------------------------
2138
2139The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2140generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2141
2142`--insn32'
2143`--no-insn32'
2144     These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in
2145     code generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy
2146     binding stubs, or in relaxation.  If `--insn32' is used, then the
2147     linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings.  By default or if
2148     `--no-insn32' is used, all instruction encodings are used,
2149     including 16-bit ones where possible.
2150
2151
2152
2153File: ld.info,  Node: Environment,  Prev: Options,  Up: Invocation
2154
21552.2 Environment Variables
2156=========================
2157
2158You can change the behaviour of `ld' with the environment variables
2159`GNUTARGET', `LDEMULATION' and `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE'.
2160
2161   `GNUTARGET' determines the input-file object format if you don't use
2162`-b' (or its synonym `--format').  Its value should be one of the BFD
2163names for an input format (*note BFD::).  If there is no `GNUTARGET' in
2164the environment, `ld' uses the natural format of the target. If
2165`GNUTARGET' is set to `default' then BFD attempts to discover the input
2166format by examining binary input files; this method often succeeds, but
2167there are potential ambiguities, since there is no method of ensuring
2168that the magic number used to specify object-file formats is unique.
2169However, the configuration procedure for BFD on each system places the
2170conventional format for that system first in the search-list, so
2171ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2172
2173   `LDEMULATION' determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2174`-m' option.  The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2175behaviour, particularly the default linker script.  You can list the
2176available emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.  If the `-m'
2177option is not used, and the `LDEMULATION' environment variable is not
2178defined, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
2179configured.
2180
2181   Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols.  However, if
2182`COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is set in the environment, then it will default
2183to not demangling symbols.  This environment variable is used in a
2184similar fashion by the `gcc' linker wrapper program.  The default may
2185be overridden by the `--demangle' and `--no-demangle' options.
2186
2187
2188File: ld.info,  Node: Scripts,  Next: Machine Dependent,  Prev: Invocation,  Up: Top
2189
21903 Linker Scripts
2191****************
2192
2193Every link is controlled by a "linker script".  This script is written
2194in the linker command language.
2195
2196   The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the
2197sections in the input files should be mapped into the output file, and
2198to control the memory layout of the output file.  Most linker scripts
2199do nothing more than this.  However, when necessary, the linker script
2200can also direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the
2201commands described below.
2202
2203   The linker always uses a linker script.  If you do not supply one
2204yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2205linker executable.  You can use the `--verbose' command line option to
2206display the default linker script.  Certain command line options, such
2207as `-r' or `-N', will affect the default linker script.
2208
2209   You may supply your own linker script by using the `-T' command line
2210option.  When you do this, your linker script will replace the default
2211linker script.
2212
2213   You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input
2214files to the linker, as though they were files to be linked.  *Note
2215Implicit Linker Scripts::.
2216
2217* Menu:
2218
2219* Basic Script Concepts::	Basic Linker Script Concepts
2220* Script Format::		Linker Script Format
2221* Simple Example::		Simple Linker Script Example
2222* Simple Commands::		Simple Linker Script Commands
2223* Assignments::			Assigning Values to Symbols
2224* SECTIONS::			SECTIONS Command
2225* MEMORY::			MEMORY Command
2226* PHDRS::			PHDRS Command
2227* VERSION::			VERSION Command
2228* Expressions::			Expressions in Linker Scripts
2229* Implicit Linker Scripts::	Implicit Linker Scripts
2230
2231
2232File: ld.info,  Node: Basic Script Concepts,  Next: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
2233
22343.1 Basic Linker Script Concepts
2235================================
2236
2237We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2238describe the linker script language.
2239
2240   The linker combines input files into a single output file.  The
2241output file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2242"object file format".  Each file is called an "object file".  The
2243output file is often called an "executable", but for our purposes we
2244will also call it an object file.  Each object file has, among other
2245things, a list of "sections".  We sometimes refer to a section in an
2246input file as an "input section"; similarly, a section in the output
2247file is an "output section".
2248
2249   Each section in an object file has a name and a size.  Most sections
2250also have an associated block of data, known as the "section contents".
2251A section may be marked as "loadable", which mean that the contents
2252should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.  A section
2253with no contents may be "allocatable", which means that an area in
2254memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be loaded
2255there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out).  A section which
2256is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort of
2257debugging information.
2258
2259   Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses.  The
2260first is the "VMA", or virtual memory address.  This is the address the
2261section will have when the output file is run.  The second is the
2262"LMA", or load memory address.  This is the address at which the
2263section will be loaded.  In most cases the two addresses will be the
2264same.  An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2265is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2266(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2267based system).  In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2268RAM address would be the VMA.
2269
2270   You can see the sections in an object file by using the `objdump'
2271program with the `-h' option.
2272
2273   Every object file also has a list of "symbols", known as the "symbol
2274table".  A symbol may be defined or undefined.  Each symbol has a name,
2275and each defined symbol has an address, among other information.  If
2276you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you will get a
2277defined symbol for every defined function and global or static
2278variable.  Every undefined function or global variable which is
2279referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2280
2281   You can see the symbols in an object file by using the `nm' program,
2282or by using the `objdump' program with the `-t' option.
2283
2284
2285File: ld.info,  Node: Script Format,  Next: Simple Example,  Prev: Basic Script Concepts,  Up: Scripts
2286
22873.2 Linker Script Format
2288========================
2289
2290Linker scripts are text files.
2291
2292   You write a linker script as a series of commands.  Each command is
2293either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2294symbol.  You may separate commands using semicolons.  Whitespace is
2295generally ignored.
2296
2297   Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered
2298directly.  If the file name contains a character such as a comma which
2299would otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name
2300in double quotes.  There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2301file name.
2302
2303   You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2304`/*' and `*/'.  As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent to
2305whitespace.
2306
2307
2308File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Example,  Next: Simple Commands,  Prev: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
2309
23103.3 Simple Linker Script Example
2311================================
2312
2313Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2314
2315   The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2316`SECTIONS'.  You use the `SECTIONS' command to describe the memory
2317layout of the output file.
2318
2319   The `SECTIONS' command is a powerful command.  Here we will describe
2320a simple use of it.  Let's assume your program consists only of code,
2321initialized data, and uninitialized data.  These will be in the
2322`.text', `.data', and `.bss' sections, respectively.  Let's assume
2323further that these are the only sections which appear in your input
2324files.
2325
2326   For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
23270x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000.  Here is a
2328linker script which will do that:
2329     SECTIONS
2330     {
2331       . = 0x10000;
2332       .text : { *(.text) }
2333       . = 0x8000000;
2334       .data : { *(.data) }
2335       .bss : { *(.bss) }
2336     }
2337
2338   You write the `SECTIONS' command as the keyword `SECTIONS', followed
2339by a series of symbol assignments and output section descriptions
2340enclosed in curly braces.
2341
2342   The first line inside the `SECTIONS' command of the above example
2343sets the value of the special symbol `.', which is the location
2344counter.  If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2345other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2346current value of the location counter.  The location counter is then
2347incremented by the size of the output section.  At the start of the
2348`SECTIONS' command, the location counter has the value `0'.
2349
2350   The second line defines an output section, `.text'.  The colon is
2351required syntax which may be ignored for now.  Within the curly braces
2352after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2353which should be placed into this output section.  The `*' is a wildcard
2354which matches any file name.  The expression `*(.text)' means all
2355`.text' input sections in all input files.
2356
2357   Since the location counter is `0x10000' when the output section
2358`.text' is defined, the linker will set the address of the `.text'
2359section in the output file to be `0x10000'.
2360
2361   The remaining lines define the `.data' and `.bss' sections in the
2362output file.  The linker will place the `.data' output section at
2363address `0x8000000'.  After the linker places the `.data' output
2364section, the value of the location counter will be `0x8000000' plus the
2365size of the `.data' output section.  The effect is that the linker will
2366place the `.bss' output section immediately after the `.data' output
2367section in memory.
2368
2369   The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2370alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary.  In this
2371example, the specified addresses for the `.text' and `.data' sections
2372will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker may
2373have to create a small gap between the `.data' and `.bss' sections.
2374
2375   That's it!  That's a simple and complete linker script.
2376
2377
2378File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Commands,  Next: Assignments,  Prev: Simple Example,  Up: Scripts
2379
23803.4 Simple Linker Script Commands
2381=================================
2382
2383In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2384
2385* Menu:
2386
2387* Entry Point::			Setting the entry point
2388* File Commands::		Commands dealing with files
2389
2390* Format Commands::		Commands dealing with object file formats
2391
2392* REGION_ALIAS::		Assign alias names to memory regions
2393* Miscellaneous Commands::	Other linker script commands
2394
2395
2396File: ld.info,  Node: Entry Point,  Next: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
2397
23983.4.1 Setting the Entry Point
2399-----------------------------
2400
2401The first instruction to execute in a program is called the "entry
2402point".  You can use the `ENTRY' linker script command to set the entry
2403point.  The argument is a symbol name:
2404     ENTRY(SYMBOL)
2405
2406   There are several ways to set the entry point.  The linker will set
2407the entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2408stopping when one of them succeeds:
2409   * the `-e' ENTRY command-line option;
2410
2411   * the `ENTRY(SYMBOL)' command in a linker script;
2412
2413   * the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined;  For many
2414     targets this is `start', but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2415     check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one
2416     found.
2417
2418   * the address of the first byte of the `.text' section, if present;
2419
2420   * The address `0'.
2421
2422
2423File: ld.info,  Node: File Commands,  Next: Format Commands,  Prev: Entry Point,  Up: Simple Commands
2424
24253.4.2 Commands Dealing with Files
2426---------------------------------
2427
2428Several linker script commands deal with files.
2429
2430`INCLUDE FILENAME'
2431     Include the linker script FILENAME at this point.  The file will
2432     be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory
2433     specified with the `-L' option.  You can nest calls to `INCLUDE'
2434     up to 10 levels deep.
2435
2436     You can place `INCLUDE' directives at the top level, in `MEMORY' or
2437     `SECTIONS' commands, or in output section descriptions.
2438
2439`INPUT(FILE, FILE, ...)'
2440`INPUT(FILE FILE ...)'
2441     The `INPUT' command directs the linker to include the named files
2442     in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2443
2444     For example, if you always want to include `subr.o' any time you do
2445     a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command
2446     line, then you can put `INPUT (subr.o)' in your linker script.
2447
2448     In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the
2449     linker script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a `-T'
2450     option.
2451
2452     In case a "sysroot prefix" is configured, and the filename starts
2453     with the `/' character, and the script being processed was located
2454     inside the "sysroot prefix", the filename will be looked for in
2455     the "sysroot prefix".  Otherwise, the linker will try to open the
2456     file in the current directory.  If it is not found, the linker
2457     will search through the archive library search path.  See the
2458     description of `-L' in *note Command Line Options: Options.
2459
2460     If you use `INPUT (-lFILE)', `ld' will transform the name to
2461     `libFILE.a', as with the command line argument `-l'.
2462
2463     When you use the `INPUT' command in an implicit linker script, the
2464     files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2465     script file is included.  This can affect archive searching.
2466
2467`GROUP(FILE, FILE, ...)'
2468`GROUP(FILE FILE ...)'
2469     The `GROUP' command is like `INPUT', except that the named files
2470     should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2471     new undefined references are created.  See the description of `-('
2472     in *note Command Line Options: Options.
2473
2474`AS_NEEDED(FILE, FILE, ...)'
2475`AS_NEEDED(FILE FILE ...)'
2476     This construct can appear only inside of the `INPUT' or `GROUP'
2477     commands, among other filenames.  The files listed will be handled
2478     as if they appear directly in the `INPUT' or `GROUP' commands,
2479     with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2480     when they are actually needed.  This construct essentially enables
2481     `--as-needed' option for all the files listed inside of it and
2482     restores previous `--as-needed' resp. `--no-as-needed' setting
2483     afterwards.
2484
2485`OUTPUT(FILENAME)'
2486     The `OUTPUT' command names the output file.  Using
2487     `OUTPUT(FILENAME)' in the linker script is exactly like using `-o
2488     FILENAME' on the command line (*note Command Line Options:
2489     Options.).  If both are used, the command line option takes
2490     precedence.
2491
2492     You can use the `OUTPUT' command to define a default name for the
2493     output file other than the usual default of `a.out'.
2494
2495`SEARCH_DIR(PATH)'
2496     The `SEARCH_DIR' command adds PATH to the list of paths where `ld'
2497     looks for archive libraries.  Using `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)' is exactly
2498     like using `-L PATH' on the command line (*note Command Line
2499     Options: Options.).  If both are used, then the linker will search
2500     both paths.  Paths specified using the command line option are
2501     searched first.
2502
2503`STARTUP(FILENAME)'
2504     The `STARTUP' command is just like the `INPUT' command, except
2505     that FILENAME will become the first input file to be linked, as
2506     though it were specified first on the command line.  This may be
2507     useful when using a system in which the entry point is always the
2508     start of the first file.
2509
2510
2511File: ld.info,  Node: Format Commands,  Next: REGION_ALIAS,  Prev: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
2512
25133.4.3 Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
2514-----------------------------------------------
2515
2516A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2517
2518`OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)'
2519`OUTPUT_FORMAT(DEFAULT, BIG, LITTLE)'
2520     The `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command names the BFD format to use for the
2521     output file (*note BFD::).  Using `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)' is
2522     exactly like using `--oformat BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
2523     Command Line Options: Options.).  If both are used, the command
2524     line option takes precedence.
2525
2526     You can use `OUTPUT_FORMAT' with three arguments to use different
2527     formats based on the `-EB' and `-EL' command line options.  This
2528     permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
2529     desired endianness.
2530
2531     If neither `-EB' nor `-EL' are used, then the output format will
2532     be the first argument, DEFAULT.  If `-EB' is used, the output
2533     format will be the second argument, BIG.  If `-EL' is used, the
2534     output format will be the third argument, LITTLE.
2535
2536     For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target
2537     uses this command:
2538          OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
2539     This says that the default format for the output file is
2540     `elf32-bigmips', but if the user uses the `-EL' command line
2541     option, the output file will be created in the `elf32-littlemips'
2542     format.
2543
2544`TARGET(BFDNAME)'
2545     The `TARGET' command names the BFD format to use when reading input
2546     files.  It affects subsequent `INPUT' and `GROUP' commands.  This
2547     command is like using `-b BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
2548     Command Line Options: Options.).  If the `TARGET' command is used
2549     but `OUTPUT_FORMAT' is not, then the last `TARGET' command is also
2550     used to set the format for the output file.  *Note BFD::.
2551
2552
2553File: ld.info,  Node: REGION_ALIAS,  Next: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: Format Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
2554
25553.4.4 Assign alias names to memory regions
2556------------------------------------------
2557
2558Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
2559*note MEMORY:: command.  Each name corresponds to at most one memory
2560region.
2561
2562     REGION_ALIAS(ALIAS, REGION)
2563
2564   The `REGION_ALIAS' function creates an alias name ALIAS for the
2565memory region REGION.  This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
2566to memory regions.  An example follows.
2567
2568   Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with
2569various memory storage devices.  All have a general purpose, volatile
2570memory `RAM' that allows code execution or data storage.  Some may have
2571a read-only, non-volatile memory `ROM' that allows code execution and
2572read-only data access.  The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile
2573memory `ROM2' with read-only data access and no code execution
2574capability.  We have four output sections:
2575
2576   * `.text' program code;
2577
2578   * `.rodata' read-only data;
2579
2580   * `.data' read-write initialized data;
2581
2582   * `.bss' read-write zero initialized data.
2583
2584   The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system
2585independent part defining the output sections and a system dependent
2586part mapping the output sections to the memory regions available on the
2587system.  Our embedded systems come with three different memory setups
2588`A', `B' and `C':
2589Section            Variant A          Variant B          Variant C
2590.text              RAM                ROM                ROM
2591.rodata            RAM                ROM                ROM2
2592.data              RAM                RAM/ROM            RAM/ROM2
2593.bss               RAM                RAM                RAM
2594   The notation `RAM/ROM' or `RAM/ROM2' means that this section is
2595loaded into region `ROM' or `ROM2' respectively.  Please note that the
2596load address of the `.data' section starts in all three variants at the
2597end of the `.rodata' section.
2598
2599   The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows.
2600It includes the system dependent `linkcmds.memory' file that describes
2601the memory layout:
2602     INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
2603
2604     SECTIONS
2605       {
2606         .text :
2607           {
2608             *(.text)
2609           } > REGION_TEXT
2610         .rodata :
2611           {
2612             *(.rodata)
2613             rodata_end = .;
2614           } > REGION_RODATA
2615         .data : AT (rodata_end)
2616           {
2617             data_start = .;
2618             *(.data)
2619           } > REGION_DATA
2620         data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
2621         data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
2622         .bss :
2623           {
2624             *(.bss)
2625           } > REGION_BSS
2626       }
2627
2628   Now we need three different `linkcmds.memory' files to define memory
2629regions and alias names.  The content of `linkcmds.memory' for the three
2630variants `A', `B' and `C':
2631`A'
2632     Here everything goes into the `RAM'.
2633          MEMORY
2634            {
2635              RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
2636            }
2637
2638          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
2639          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
2640          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
2641          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
2642
2643`B'
2644     Program code and read-only data go into the `ROM'.  Read-write
2645     data goes into the `RAM'.  An image of the initialized data is
2646     loaded into the `ROM' and will be copied during system start into
2647     the `RAM'.
2648          MEMORY
2649            {
2650              ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
2651              RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
2652            }
2653
2654          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
2655          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
2656          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
2657          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
2658
2659`C'
2660     Program code goes into the `ROM'.  Read-only data goes into the
2661     `ROM2'.  Read-write data goes into the `RAM'.  An image of the
2662     initialized data is loaded into the `ROM2' and will be copied
2663     during system start into the `RAM'.
2664          MEMORY
2665            {
2666              ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
2667              ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
2668              RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
2669            }
2670
2671          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
2672          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
2673          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
2674          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
2675
2676   It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to
2677copy the `.data' section from `ROM' or `ROM2' into the `RAM' if
2678necessary:
2679     #include <string.h>
2680
2681     extern char data_start [];
2682     extern char data_size [];
2683     extern char data_load_start [];
2684
2685     void copy_data(void)
2686     {
2687       if (data_start != data_load_start)
2688         {
2689           memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
2690         }
2691     }
2692
2693
2694File: ld.info,  Node: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: REGION_ALIAS,  Up: Simple Commands
2695
26963.4.5 Other Linker Script Commands
2697----------------------------------
2698
2699There are a few other linker scripts commands.
2700
2701`ASSERT(EXP, MESSAGE)'
2702     Ensure that EXP is non-zero.  If it is zero, then exit the linker
2703     with an error code, and print MESSAGE.
2704
2705`EXTERN(SYMBOL SYMBOL ...)'
2706     Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
2707     symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
2708     modules from standard libraries.  You may list several SYMBOLs for
2709     each `EXTERN', and you may use `EXTERN' multiple times.  This
2710     command has the same effect as the `-u' command-line option.
2711
2712`FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
2713     This command has the same effect as the `-d' command-line option:
2714     to make `ld' assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
2715     output file is specified (`-r').
2716
2717`INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
2718     This command has the same effect as the `--no-define-common'
2719     command-line option: to make `ld' omit the assignment of addresses
2720     to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
2721
2722`INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] OUTPUT_SECTION'
2723     This command is typically used in a script specified by `-T' to
2724     augment the default `SECTIONS' with, for example, overlays.  It
2725     inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
2726     OUTPUT_SECTION, and also causes `-T' to not override the default
2727     linker script.  The exact insertion point is as for orphan
2728     sections.  *Note Location Counter::.  The insertion happens after
2729     the linker has mapped input sections to output sections.  Prior to
2730     the insertion, since `-T' scripts are parsed before the default
2731     linker script, statements in the `-T' script occur before the
2732     default linker script statements in the internal linker
2733     representation of the script.  In particular, input section
2734     assignments will be made to `-T' output sections before those in
2735     the default script.  Here is an example of how a `-T' script using
2736     `INSERT' might look:
2737
2738          SECTIONS
2739          {
2740            OVERLAY :
2741            {
2742              .ov1 { ov1*(.text) }
2743              .ov2 { ov2*(.text) }
2744            }
2745          }
2746          INSERT AFTER .text;
2747
2748`NOCROSSREFS(SECTION SECTION ...)'
2749     This command may be used to tell `ld' to issue an error about any
2750     references among certain output sections.
2751
2752     In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
2753     using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another
2754     section will not be.  Any direct references between the two
2755     sections would be errors.  For example, it would be an error if
2756     code in one section called a function defined in the other section.
2757
2758     The `NOCROSSREFS' command takes a list of output section names.  If
2759     `ld' detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
2760     an error and returns a non-zero exit status.  Note that the
2761     `NOCROSSREFS' command uses output section names, not input section
2762     names.
2763
2764`OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH)'
2765     Specify a particular output machine architecture.  The argument is
2766     one of the names used by the BFD library (*note BFD::).  You can
2767     see the architecture of an object file by using the `objdump'
2768     program with the `-f' option.
2769
2770`LD_FEATURE(STRING)'
2771     This command may be used to modify `ld' behavior.  If STRING is
2772     `"SANE_EXPR"' then absolute symbols and numbers in a script are
2773     simply treated as numbers everywhere.  *Note Expression Section::.
2774
2775
2776File: ld.info,  Node: Assignments,  Next: SECTIONS,  Prev: Simple Commands,  Up: Scripts
2777
27783.5 Assigning Values to Symbols
2779===============================
2780
2781You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script.  This will define
2782the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
2783
2784* Menu:
2785
2786* Simple Assignments::		Simple Assignments
2787* PROVIDE::			PROVIDE
2788* PROVIDE_HIDDEN::		PROVIDE_HIDDEN
2789* Source Code Reference::	How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
2790
2791
2792File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Assignments,  Next: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
2793
27943.5.1 Simple Assignments
2795------------------------
2796
2797You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
2798
2799`SYMBOL = EXPRESSION ;'
2800`SYMBOL += EXPRESSION ;'
2801`SYMBOL -= EXPRESSION ;'
2802`SYMBOL *= EXPRESSION ;'
2803`SYMBOL /= EXPRESSION ;'
2804`SYMBOL <<= EXPRESSION ;'
2805`SYMBOL >>= EXPRESSION ;'
2806`SYMBOL &= EXPRESSION ;'
2807`SYMBOL |= EXPRESSION ;'
2808
2809   The first case will define SYMBOL to the value of EXPRESSION.  In
2810the other cases, SYMBOL must already be defined, and the value will be
2811adjusted accordingly.
2812
2813   The special symbol name `.' indicates the location counter.  You may
2814only use this within a `SECTIONS' command.  *Note Location Counter::.
2815
2816   The semicolon after EXPRESSION is required.
2817
2818   Expressions are defined below; see *note Expressions::.
2819
2820   You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or
2821as statements within a `SECTIONS' command, or as part of an output
2822section description in a `SECTIONS' command.
2823
2824   The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
2825expression; for more information, see *note Expression Section::.
2826
2827   Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
2828assignments may be used:
2829
2830     floating_point = 0;
2831     SECTIONS
2832     {
2833       .text :
2834         {
2835           *(.text)
2836           _etext = .;
2837         }
2838       _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
2839       .data : { *(.data) }
2840     }
2841   In this example, the symbol `floating_point' will be defined as
2842zero.  The symbol `_etext' will be defined as the address following the
2843last `.text' input section.  The symbol `_bdata' will be defined as the
2844address following the `.text' output section aligned upward to a 4 byte
2845boundary.
2846
2847
2848File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE,  Next: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Prev: Simple Assignments,  Up: Assignments
2849
28503.5.2 PROVIDE
2851-------------
2852
2853In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
2854only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
2855the link.  For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol `etext'.
2856However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use `etext' as a
2857function name without encountering an error.  The `PROVIDE' keyword may
2858be used to define a symbol, such as `etext', only if it is referenced
2859but not defined.  The syntax is `PROVIDE(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'.
2860
2861   Here is an example of using `PROVIDE' to define `etext':
2862     SECTIONS
2863     {
2864       .text :
2865         {
2866           *(.text)
2867           _etext = .;
2868           PROVIDE(etext = .);
2869         }
2870     }
2871
2872   In this example, if the program defines `_etext' (with a leading
2873underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error.  If, on
2874the other hand, the program defines `etext' (with no leading
2875underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
2876If the program references `etext' but does not define it, the linker
2877will use the definition in the linker script.
2878
2879
2880File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Next: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
2881
28823.5.3 PROVIDE_HIDDEN
2883--------------------
2884
2885Similar to `PROVIDE'.  For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
2886hidden and won't be exported.
2887
2888
2889File: ld.info,  Node: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Up: Assignments
2890
28913.5.4 Source Code Reference
2892---------------------------
2893
2894Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
2895intuitive.  In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to a
2896variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a symbol
2897that does not have a value.
2898
2899   Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
2900transform names in the source code into different names when they are
2901stored in the symbol table.  For example, Fortran compilers commonly
2902prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive `name
2903mangling'.  Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name of
2904a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
2905variable as it is defined in a linker script.  For example in C a
2906linker script variable might be referred to as:
2907
2908       extern int foo;
2909
2910   But in the linker script it might be defined as:
2911
2912       _foo = 1000;
2913
2914   In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
2915transformation has taken place.
2916
2917   When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
2918things happen.  The first is that the compiler reserves enough space in
2919the program's memory to hold the _value_ of the symbol.  The second is
2920that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol table which
2921holds the symbol's _address_.  ie the symbol table contains the address
2922of the block of memory holding the symbol's value.  So for example the
2923following C declaration, at file scope:
2924
2925       int foo = 1000;
2926
2927   creates a entry called `foo' in the symbol table.  This entry holds
2928the address of an `int' sized block of memory where the number 1000 is
2929initially stored.
2930
2931   When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
2932first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
2933memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
2934So:
2935
2936       foo = 1;
2937
2938   looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets the address
2939associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
2940address.  Whereas:
2941
2942       int * a = & foo;
2943
2944   looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets it address and
2945then copies this address into the block of memory associated with the
2946variable `a'.
2947
2948   Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
2949the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them.  Thus they are
2950an address without a value.  So for example the linker script
2951definition:
2952
2953       foo = 1000;
2954
2955   creates an entry in the symbol table called `foo' which holds the
2956address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
2957address 1000.  This means that you cannot access the _value_ of a
2958linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
2959access the _address_ of a linker script defined symbol.
2960
2961   Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source
2962code you should always take the address of the symbol, and never
2963attempt to use its value.  For example suppose you want to copy the
2964contents of a section of memory called .ROM into a section called
2965.FLASH and the linker script contains these declarations:
2966
2967       start_of_ROM   = .ROM;
2968       end_of_ROM     = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
2969       start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
2970
2971   Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
2972
2973       extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
2974
2975       memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
2976
2977   Note the use of the `&' operators.  These are correct.
2978
2979
2980File: ld.info,  Node: SECTIONS,  Next: MEMORY,  Prev: Assignments,  Up: Scripts
2981
29823.6 SECTIONS Command
2983====================
2984
2985The `SECTIONS' command tells the linker how to map input sections into
2986output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
2987
2988   The format of the `SECTIONS' command is:
2989     SECTIONS
2990     {
2991       SECTIONS-COMMAND
2992       SECTIONS-COMMAND
2993       ...
2994     }
2995
2996   Each SECTIONS-COMMAND may of be one of the following:
2997
2998   * an `ENTRY' command (*note Entry command: Entry Point.)
2999
3000   * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
3001
3002   * an output section description
3003
3004   * an overlay description
3005
3006   The `ENTRY' command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3007`SECTIONS' command for convenience in using the location counter in
3008those commands.  This can also make the linker script easier to
3009understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3010the layout of the output file.
3011
3012   Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3013below.
3014
3015   If you do not use a `SECTIONS' command in your linker script, the
3016linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3017section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3018input files.  If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3019example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3020in the first input file.  The first section will be at address zero.
3021
3022* Menu:
3023
3024* Output Section Description::	Output section description
3025* Output Section Name::		Output section name
3026* Output Section Address::	Output section address
3027* Input Section::		Input section description
3028* Output Section Data::		Output section data
3029* Output Section Keywords::	Output section keywords
3030* Output Section Discarding::	Output section discarding
3031* Output Section Attributes::	Output section attributes
3032* Overlay Description::		Overlay description
3033
3034
3035File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Description,  Next: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
3036
30373.6.1 Output Section Description
3038--------------------------------
3039
3040The full description of an output section looks like this:
3041     SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
3042       [AT(LMA)]
3043       [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)]
3044       [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
3045       [CONSTRAINT]
3046       {
3047         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3048         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3049         ...
3050       } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
3051
3052   Most output sections do not use most of the optional section
3053attributes.
3054
3055   The whitespace around SECTION is required, so that the section name
3056is unambiguous.  The colon and the curly braces are also required.  The
3057line breaks and other white space are optional.
3058
3059   Each OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND may be one of the following:
3060
3061   * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
3062
3063   * an input section description (*note Input Section::)
3064
3065   * data values to include directly (*note Output Section Data::)
3066
3067   * a special output section keyword (*note Output Section Keywords::)
3068
3069
3070File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Name,  Next: Output Section Address,  Prev: Output Section Description,  Up: SECTIONS
3071
30723.6.2 Output Section Name
3073-------------------------
3074
3075The name of the output section is SECTION.  SECTION must meet the
3076constraints of your output format.  In formats which only support a
3077limited number of sections, such as `a.out', the name must be one of
3078the names supported by the format (`a.out', for example, allows only
3079`.text', `.data' or `.bss'). If the output format supports any number
3080of sections, but with numbers and not names (as is the case for Oasys),
3081the name should be supplied as a quoted numeric string.  A section name
3082may consist of any sequence of characters, but a name which contains
3083any unusual characters such as commas must be quoted.
3084
3085   The output section name `/DISCARD/' is special; *note Output Section
3086Discarding::.
3087
3088
3089File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Address,  Next: Input Section,  Prev: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
3090
30913.6.3 Output Section Address
3092----------------------------
3093
3094The ADDRESS is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory address)
3095of the output section.  This address is optional, but if it is provided
3096then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3097
3098   If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for
3099the section, based on the heuristic below.  This address will be
3100adjusted to fit the alignment requirement of the output section.  The
3101alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3102contained within the output section.
3103
3104   The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3105
3106   * If an output memory REGION is set for the section then it is added
3107     to this region and its address will be the next free address in
3108     that region.
3109
3110   * If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3111     regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with
3112     the section is selected to contain it.  The section's output
3113     address will be the next free address in that region; *note
3114     MEMORY::.
3115
3116   * If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3117     the output address will be based on the current value of the
3118     location counter.
3119
3120For example:
3121
3122     .text . : { *(.text) }
3123
3124and
3125
3126     .text : { *(.text) }
3127
3128are subtly different.  The first will set the address of the `.text'
3129output section to the current value of the location counter.  The
3130second will set it to the current value of the location counter aligned
3131to the strictest alignment of any of the `.text' input sections.
3132
3133   The ADDRESS may be an arbitrary expression; *note Expressions::.
3134For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3135so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3136do something like this:
3137     .text ALIGN(0x10) : { *(.text) }
3138   This works because `ALIGN' returns the current location counter
3139aligned upward to the specified value.
3140
3141   Specifying ADDRESS for a section will change the value of the
3142location counter, provided that the section is non-empty.  (Empty
3143sections are ignored).
3144
3145
3146File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section,  Next: Output Section Data,  Prev: Output Section Address,  Up: SECTIONS
3147
31483.6.4 Input Section Description
3149-------------------------------
3150
3151The most common output section command is an input section description.
3152
3153   The input section description is the most basic linker script
3154operation.  You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out
3155your program in memory.  You use input section descriptions to tell the
3156linker how to map the input files into your memory layout.
3157
3158* Menu:
3159
3160* Input Section Basics::	Input section basics
3161* Input Section Wildcards::	Input section wildcard patterns
3162* Input Section Common::	Input section for common symbols
3163* Input Section Keep::		Input section and garbage collection
3164* Input Section Example::	Input section example
3165
3166
3167File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Basics,  Next: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
3168
31693.6.4.1 Input Section Basics
3170............................
3171
3172An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3173by a list of section names in parentheses.
3174
3175   The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3176describe further below (*note Input Section Wildcards::).
3177
3178   The most common input section description is to include all input
3179sections with a particular name in the output section.  For example, to
3180include all input `.text' sections, you would write:
3181     *(.text)
3182   Here the `*' is a wildcard which matches any file name.  To exclude
3183a list of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may
3184be used to match all files except the ones specified in the
3185EXCLUDE_FILE list.  For example:
3186     *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3187   will cause all .ctors sections from all files except `crtend.o' and
3188`otherfile.o' to be included.
3189
3190   There are two ways to include more than one section:
3191     *(.text .rdata)
3192     *(.text) *(.rdata)
3193   The difference between these is the order in which the `.text' and
3194`.rdata' input sections will appear in the output section.  In the
3195first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3196they are found in the linker input.  In the second example, all `.text'
3197input sections will appear first, followed by all `.rdata' input
3198sections.
3199
3200   You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular
3201file.  You would do this if one or more of your files contain special
3202data that needs to be at a particular location in memory.  For example:
3203     data.o(.data)
3204
3205   To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3206of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3207
3208   Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF
3209sections:
3210
3211     SECTIONS {
3212       .text : { INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) }
3213       .text2 :  { INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) }
3214     }
3215
3216   In this example, the output section `.text' will be comprised of any
3217input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3218`SHF_MERGE' and `SHF_STRINGS' are set.  The output section `.text2'
3219will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text) whose
3220section header flag `SHF_WRITE' is clear.
3221
3222   You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3223matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file, with
3224no whitespace around the colon.
3225
3226`archive:file'
3227     matches file within archive
3228
3229`archive:'
3230     matches the whole archive
3231
3232`:file'
3233     matches file but not one in an archive
3234
3235   Either one or both of `archive' and `file' can contain shell
3236wildcards.  On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3237single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so `c:myfile.o'
3238is a simple file specification, not `myfile.o' within an archive called
3239`c'.  `archive:file' filespecs may also be used within an
3240`EXCLUDE_FILE' list, but may not appear in other linker script
3241contexts.  For instance, you cannot extract a file from an archive by
3242using `archive:file' in an `INPUT' command.
3243
3244   If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections
3245in the input file will be included in the output section.  This is not
3246commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion.  For example:
3247     data.o
3248
3249   When you use a file name which is not an `archive:file' specifier
3250and does not contain any wild card characters, the linker will first
3251see if you also specified the file name on the linker command line or
3252in an `INPUT' command.  If you did not, the linker will attempt to open
3253the file as an input file, as though it appeared on the command line.
3254Note that this differs from an `INPUT' command, because the linker will
3255not search for the file in the archive search path.
3256
3257
3258File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Wildcards,  Next: Input Section Common,  Prev: Input Section Basics,  Up: Input Section
3259
32603.6.4.2 Input Section Wildcard Patterns
3261.......................................
3262
3263In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3264name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3265
3266   The file name of `*' seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3267pattern for the file name.
3268
3269   The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3270
3271`*'
3272     matches any number of characters
3273
3274`?'
3275     matches any single character
3276
3277`[CHARS]'
3278     matches a single instance of any of the CHARS; the `-' character
3279     may be used to specify a range of characters, as in `[a-z]' to
3280     match any lower case letter
3281
3282`\'
3283     quotes the following character
3284
3285   When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3286will not match a `/' character (used to separate directory names on
3287Unix).  A pattern consisting of a single `*' character is an exception;
3288it will always match any file name, whether it contains a `/' or not.
3289In a section name, the wildcard characters will match a `/' character.
3290
3291   File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3292specified on the command line or in an `INPUT' command.  The linker
3293does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3294
3295   If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file
3296name appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the
3297linker will use the first match in the linker script.  For example, this
3298sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3299`data.o' rule will not be used:
3300     .data : { *(.data) }
3301     .data1 : { data.o(.data) }
3302
3303   Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by
3304wildcards in the order in which they are seen during the link.  You can
3305change this by using the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword, which appears before a
3306wildcard pattern in parentheses (e.g., `SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)').  When
3307the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or
3308sections into ascending order by name before placing them in the output
3309file.
3310
3311   `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' is very similar to `SORT_BY_NAME'. The
3312difference is `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' will sort sections into ascending
3313order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3314
3315   `SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY' is very similar to `SORT_BY_NAME'. The
3316difference is `SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY' will sort sections into ascending
3317order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in
3318the section name before placing them in the output file.
3319
3320   `SORT' is an alias for `SORT_BY_NAME'.
3321
3322   When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script,
3323there can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3324
3325  1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern)).
3326     It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment
3327     if 2 sections have the same name.
3328
3329  2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
3330     It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name
3331     if 2 sections have the same alignment.
3332
3333  3. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)) is
3334     treated the same as `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern).
3335
3336  4. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section
3337     pattern)) is treated the same as `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard
3338     section pattern).
3339
3340  5. All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3341
3342   When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3343section sorting command are used, section sorting command always takes
3344precedence over the command line option.
3345
3346   If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3347command line option will make the section sorting command to be treated
3348as nested sorting command.
3349
3350  1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern ) with `--sort-sections
3351     alignment' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
3352     (wildcard section pattern)).
3353
3354  2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern) with
3355     `--sort-section name' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
3356     (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
3357
3358   If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3359command line option will be ignored.
3360
3361   If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use
3362the `-M' linker option to generate a map file.  The map file shows
3363precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3364
3365   This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3366files.  This linker script directs the linker to place all `.text'
3367sections in `.text' and all `.bss' sections in `.bss'.  The linker will
3368place the `.data' section from all files beginning with an upper case
3369character in `.DATA'; for all other files, the linker will place the
3370`.data' section in `.data'.
3371     SECTIONS {
3372       .text : { *(.text) }
3373       .DATA : { [A-Z]*(.data) }
3374       .data : { *(.data) }
3375       .bss : { *(.bss) }
3376     }
3377
3378
3379File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Common,  Next: Input Section Keep,  Prev: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
3380
33813.6.4.3 Input Section for Common Symbols
3382........................................
3383
3384A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3385file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section.  The
3386linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3387named `COMMON'.
3388
3389   You may use file names with the `COMMON' section just as with any
3390other input sections.  You can use this to place common symbols from a
3391particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3392input files are placed in another section.
3393
3394   In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3395`.bss' section in the output file.  For example:
3396     .bss { *(.bss) *(COMMON) }
3397
3398   Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.
3399For example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard
3400common symbols and small common symbols.  In this case, the linker will
3401use a different special section name for other types of common symbols.
3402In the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses `COMMON' for standard common
3403symbols and `.scommon' for small common symbols.  This permits you to
3404map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3405locations.
3406
3407   You will sometimes see `[COMMON]' in old linker scripts.  This
3408notation is now considered obsolete.  It is equivalent to `*(COMMON)'.
3409
3410
3411File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Keep,  Next: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Common,  Up: Input Section
3412
34133.6.4.4 Input Section and Garbage Collection
3414............................................
3415
3416When link-time garbage collection is in use (`--gc-sections'), it is
3417often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.  This is
3418accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry with
3419`KEEP()', as in `KEEP(*(.init))' or `KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))'.
3420
3421
3422File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Keep,  Up: Input Section
3423
34243.6.4.5 Input Section Example
3425.............................
3426
3427The following example is a complete linker script.  It tells the linker
3428to read all of the sections from file `all.o' and place them at the
3429start of output section `outputa' which starts at location `0x10000'.
3430All of section `.input1' from file `foo.o' follows immediately, in the
3431same output section.  All of section `.input2' from `foo.o' goes into
3432output section `outputb', followed by section `.input1' from `foo1.o'.
3433All of the remaining `.input1' and `.input2' sections from any files
3434are written to output section `outputc'.
3435
3436     SECTIONS {
3437       outputa 0x10000 :
3438         {
3439         all.o
3440         foo.o (.input1)
3441         }
3442       outputb :
3443         {
3444         foo.o (.input2)
3445         foo1.o (.input1)
3446         }
3447       outputc :
3448         {
3449         *(.input1)
3450         *(.input2)
3451         }
3452     }
3453
3454
3455File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Data,  Next: Output Section Keywords,  Prev: Input Section,  Up: SECTIONS
3456
34573.6.5 Output Section Data
3458-------------------------
3459
3460You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3461`BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', `QUAD', or `SQUAD' as an output section
3462command.  Each keyword is followed by an expression in parentheses
3463providing the value to store (*note Expressions::).  The value of the
3464expression is stored at the current value of the location counter.
3465
3466   The `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', and `QUAD' commands store one, two,
3467four, and eight bytes (respectively).  After storing the bytes, the
3468location counter is incremented by the number of bytes stored.
3469
3470   For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte
3471value of the symbol `addr':
3472     BYTE(1)
3473     LONG(addr)
3474
3475   When using a 64 bit host or target, `QUAD' and `SQUAD' are the same;
3476they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value.  When both host and target
3477are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits.  In this case `QUAD'
3478stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and `SQUAD' stores a 32
3479bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
3480
3481   If the object file format of the output file has an explicit
3482endianness, which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that
3483endianness.  When the object file format does not have an explicit
3484endianness, as is true of, for example, S-records, the value will be
3485stored in the endianness of the first input object file.
3486
3487   Note--these commands only work inside a section description and not
3488between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
3489     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } LONG(1) .data : { *(.data) } }
3490   whereas this will work:
3491     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) ; LONG(1) } .data : { *(.data) } }
3492
3493   You may use the `FILL' command to set the fill pattern for the
3494current section.  It is followed by an expression in parentheses.  Any
3495otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
3496gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
3497with the value of the expression, repeated as necessary.  A `FILL'
3498statement covers memory locations after the point at which it occurs in
3499the section definition; by including more than one `FILL' statement,
3500you can have different fill patterns in different parts of an output
3501section.
3502
3503   This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
3504value `0x90':
3505     FILL(0x90909090)
3506
3507   The `FILL' command is similar to the `=FILLEXP' output section
3508attribute, but it only affects the part of the section following the
3509`FILL' command, rather than the entire section.  If both are used, the
3510`FILL' command takes precedence.  *Note Output Section Fill::, for
3511details on the fill expression.
3512
3513
3514File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Keywords,  Next: Output Section Discarding,  Prev: Output Section Data,  Up: SECTIONS
3515
35163.6.6 Output Section Keywords
3517-----------------------------
3518
3519There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
3520commands.
3521
3522`CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS'
3523     The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input
3524     file.  The name of each symbol will be the name of the
3525     corresponding input file.  The section of each symbol will be the
3526     output section in which the `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS' command
3527     appears.
3528
3529     This is conventional for the a.out object file format.  It is not
3530     normally used for any other object file format.
3531
3532`CONSTRUCTORS'
3533     When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
3534     unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
3535     destructors.  When linking object file formats which do not support
3536     arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
3537     automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by
3538     name.  For these object file formats, the `CONSTRUCTORS' command
3539     tells the linker to place constructor information in the output
3540     section where the `CONSTRUCTORS' command appears.  The
3541     `CONSTRUCTORS' command is ignored for other object file formats.
3542
3543     The symbol `__CTOR_LIST__' marks the start of the global
3544     constructors, and the symbol `__CTOR_END__' marks the end.
3545     Similarly, `__DTOR_LIST__' and `__DTOR_END__' mark the start and
3546     end of the global destructors.  The first word in the list is the
3547     number of entries, followed by the address of each constructor or
3548     destructor, followed by a zero word.  The compiler must arrange to
3549     actually run the code.  For these object file formats GNU C++
3550     normally calls constructors from a subroutine `__main'; a call to
3551     `__main' is automatically inserted into the startup code for
3552     `main'.  GNU C++ normally runs destructors either by using
3553     `atexit', or directly from the function `exit'.
3554
3555     For object file formats such as `COFF' or `ELF' which support
3556     arbitrary section names, GNU C++ will normally arrange to put the
3557     addresses of global constructors and destructors into the `.ctors'
3558     and `.dtors' sections.  Placing the following sequence into your
3559     linker script will build the sort of table which the GNU C++
3560     runtime code expects to see.
3561
3562                __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
3563                LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3564                *(.ctors)
3565                LONG(0)
3566                __CTOR_END__ = .;
3567                __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
3568                LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3569                *(.dtors)
3570                LONG(0)
3571                __DTOR_END__ = .;
3572
3573     If you are using the GNU C++ support for initialization priority,
3574     which provides some control over the order in which global
3575     constructors are run, you must sort the constructors at link time
3576     to ensure that they are executed in the correct order.  When using
3577     the `CONSTRUCTORS' command, use `SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)'
3578     instead.  When using the `.ctors' and `.dtors' sections, use
3579     `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))' and `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))' instead of
3580     just `*(.ctors)' and `*(.dtors)'.
3581
3582     Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues
3583     automatically, and you will not need to concern yourself with
3584     them.  However, you may need to consider this if you are using C++
3585     and writing your own linker scripts.
3586
3587
3588
3589File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Discarding,  Next: Output Section Attributes,  Prev: Output Section Keywords,  Up: SECTIONS
3590
35913.6.7 Output Section Discarding
3592-------------------------------
3593
3594The linker will not create output sections with no contents.  This is
3595for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not be
3596present in any of the input files.  For example:
3597     .foo : { *(.foo) }
3598   will only create a `.foo' section in the output file if there is a
3599`.foo' section in at least one input file, and if the input sections
3600are not all empty.  Other link script directives that allocate space in
3601an output section will also create the output section.
3602
3603   The linker will ignore address assignments (*note Output Section
3604Address::) on discarded output sections, except when the linker script
3605defines symbols in the output section.  In that case the linker will
3606obey the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
3607section is discarded.
3608
3609   The special output section name `/DISCARD/' may be used to discard
3610input sections.  Any input sections which are assigned to an output
3611section named `/DISCARD/' are not included in the output file.
3612
3613
3614File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Attributes,  Next: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Discarding,  Up: SECTIONS
3615
36163.6.8 Output Section Attributes
3617-------------------------------
3618
3619We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
3620like this:
3621
3622     SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
3623       [AT(LMA)]
3624       [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)]
3625       [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
3626       [CONSTRAINT]
3627       {
3628         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3629         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3630         ...
3631       } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
3632
3633   We've already described SECTION, ADDRESS, and
3634OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND.  In this section we will describe the remaining
3635section attributes.
3636
3637* Menu:
3638
3639* Output Section Type::		Output section type
3640* Output Section LMA::		Output section LMA
3641* Forced Output Alignment::	Forced Output Alignment
3642* Forced Input Alignment::	Forced Input Alignment
3643* Output Section Constraint::   Output section constraint
3644* Output Section Region::	Output section region
3645* Output Section Phdr::		Output section phdr
3646* Output Section Fill::		Output section fill
3647
3648
3649File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Type,  Next: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3650
36513.6.8.1 Output Section Type
3652...........................
3653
3654Each output section may have a type.  The type is a keyword in
3655parentheses.  The following types are defined:
3656
3657`NOLOAD'
3658     The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not
3659     be loaded into memory when the program is run.
3660
3661`DSECT'
3662`COPY'
3663`INFO'
3664`OVERLAY'
3665     These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
3666     rarely used.  They all have the same effect: the section should be
3667     marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
3668     section when the program is run.
3669
3670   The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
3671the input sections which map into it.  You can override this by using
3672the section type.  For example, in the script sample below, the `ROM'
3673section is addressed at memory location `0' and does not need to be
3674loaded when the program is run.
3675     SECTIONS {
3676       ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : { ... }
3677       ...
3678     }
3679
3680
3681File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section LMA,  Next: Forced Output Alignment,  Prev: Output Section Type,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3682
36833.6.8.2 Output Section LMA
3684..........................
3685
3686Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
3687*note Basic Script Concepts::.  The virtual address is specified by the
3688*note Output Section Address:: described earlier.  The load address is
3689specified by the `AT' or `AT>' keywords.  Specifying a load address is
3690optional.
3691
3692   The `AT' keyword takes an expression as an argument.  This specifies
3693the exact load address of the section.  The `AT>' keyword takes the
3694name of a memory region as an argument.  *Note MEMORY::.  The load
3695address of the section is set to the next free address in the region,
3696aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
3697
3698   If neither `AT' nor `AT>' is specified for an allocatable section,
3699the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the load
3700address:
3701
3702   * If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
3703     the LMA address as well.
3704
3705   * If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
3706
3707   * Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible with
3708     the current section, and this region contains at least one
3709     section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the VMA and
3710     LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of the
3711     last section in the located region.
3712
3713   * If no memory regions have been declared then a default region that
3714     covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
3715
3716   * If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
3717     section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
3718
3719   This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image.  For
3720example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
3721called `.text', which starts at `0x1000', one called `.mdata', which is
3722loaded at the end of the `.text' section even though its VMA is
3723`0x2000', and one called `.bss' to hold uninitialized data at address
3724`0x3000'.  The symbol `_data' is defined with the value `0x2000', which
3725shows that the location counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
3726
3727     SECTIONS
3728       {
3729       .text 0x1000 : { *(.text) _etext = . ; }
3730       .mdata 0x2000 :
3731         AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
3732         { _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ;  }
3733       .bss 0x3000 :
3734         { _bstart = . ;  *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;}
3735     }
3736
3737   The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated
3738with this linker script would include something like the following, to
3739copy the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.
3740Notice how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the
3741linker script.
3742
3743     extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
3744     char *src = &_etext;
3745     char *dst = &_data;
3746
3747     /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it.  */
3748     while (dst < &_edata)
3749       *dst++ = *src++;
3750
3751     /* Zero bss.  */
3752     for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
3753       *dst = 0;
3754
3755
3756File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Output Alignment,  Next: Forced Input Alignment,  Prev: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3757
37583.6.8.3 Forced Output Alignment
3759...............................
3760
3761You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
3762
3763
3764File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Input Alignment,  Next: Output Section Constraint,  Prev: Forced Output Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3765
37663.6.8.4 Forced Input Alignment
3767..............................
3768
3769You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
3770SUBALIGN.  The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
3771sections, whether larger or smaller.
3772
3773
3774File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Constraint,  Next: Output Section Region,  Prev: Forced Input Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3775
37763.6.8.5 Output Section Constraint
3777.................................
3778
3779You can specify that an output section should only be created if all of
3780its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
3781read-write by using the keyword `ONLY_IF_RO' and `ONLY_IF_RW'
3782respectively.
3783
3784
3785File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Region,  Next: Output Section Phdr,  Prev: Output Section Constraint,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3786
37873.6.8.6 Output Section Region
3788.............................
3789
3790You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
3791using `>REGION'.  *Note MEMORY::.
3792
3793   Here is a simple example:
3794     MEMORY { rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 }
3795     SECTIONS { ROM : { *(.text) } >rom }
3796
3797
3798File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Phdr,  Next: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Region,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3799
38003.6.8.7 Output Section Phdr
3801...........................
3802
3803You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
3804using `:PHDR'.  *Note PHDRS::.  If a section is assigned to one or more
3805segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be assigned to
3806those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly `:PHDR' modifier.
3807You can use `:NONE' to tell the linker to not put the section in any
3808segment at all.
3809
3810   Here is a simple example:
3811     PHDRS { text PT_LOAD ; }
3812     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } :text }
3813
3814
3815File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Phdr,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3816
38173.6.8.8 Output Section Fill
3818...........................
3819
3820You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using `=FILLEXP'.
3821FILLEXP is an expression (*note Expressions::).  Any otherwise
3822unspecified regions of memory within the output section (for example,
3823gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) will be
3824filled with the value, repeated as necessary.  If the fill expression
3825is a simple hex number, ie. a string of hex digit starting with `0x'
3826and without a trailing `k' or `M', then an arbitrarily long sequence of
3827hex digits can be used to specify the fill pattern;  Leading zeros
3828become part of the pattern too.  For all other cases, including extra
3829parentheses or a unary `+', the fill pattern is the four least
3830significant bytes of the value of the expression.  In all cases, the
3831number is big-endian.
3832
3833   You can also change the fill value with a `FILL' command in the
3834output section commands; (*note Output Section Data::).
3835
3836   Here is a simple example:
3837     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } =0x90909090 }
3838
3839
3840File: ld.info,  Node: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Attributes,  Up: SECTIONS
3841
38423.6.9 Overlay Description
3843-------------------------
3844
3845An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
3846are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
3847the same memory address.  At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
3848copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
3849required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits.  This approach
3850can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
3851than another.
3852
3853   Overlays are described using the `OVERLAY' command.  The `OVERLAY'
3854command is used within a `SECTIONS' command, like an output section
3855description.  The full syntax of the `OVERLAY' command is as follows:
3856     OVERLAY [START] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( LDADDR )]
3857       {
3858         SECNAME1
3859           {
3860             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3861             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3862             ...
3863           } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
3864         SECNAME2
3865           {
3866             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3867             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3868             ...
3869           } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
3870         ...
3871       } [>REGION] [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
3872
3873   Everything is optional except `OVERLAY' (a keyword), and each
3874section must have a name (SECNAME1 and SECNAME2 above).  The section
3875definitions within the `OVERLAY' construct are identical to those
3876within the general `SECTIONS' contruct (*note SECTIONS::), except that
3877no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for sections within
3878an `OVERLAY'.
3879
3880   The sections are all defined with the same starting address.  The
3881load addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are
3882consecutive in memory starting at the load address used for the
3883`OVERLAY' as a whole (as with normal section definitions, the load
3884address is optional, and defaults to the start address; the start
3885address is also optional, and defaults to the current value of the
3886location counter).
3887
3888   If the `NOCROSSREFS' keyword is used, and there any references among
3889the sections, the linker will report an error.  Since the sections all
3890run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
3891section to refer directly to another.  *Note NOCROSSREFS: Miscellaneous
3892Commands.
3893
3894   For each section within the `OVERLAY', the linker automatically
3895provides two symbols.  The symbol `__load_start_SECNAME' is defined as
3896the starting load address of the section.  The symbol
3897`__load_stop_SECNAME' is defined as the final load address of the
3898section.  Any characters within SECNAME which are not legal within C
3899identifiers are removed.  C (or assembler) code may use these symbols
3900to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
3901
3902   At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set
3903to the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest
3904section.
3905
3906   Here is an example.  Remember that this would appear inside a
3907`SECTIONS' construct.
3908       OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
3909        {
3910          .text0 { o1/*.o(.text) }
3911          .text1 { o2/*.o(.text) }
3912        }
3913This will define both `.text0' and `.text1' to start at address 0x1000.
3914`.text0' will be loaded at address 0x4000, and `.text1' will be loaded
3915immediately after `.text0'.  The following symbols will be defined if
3916referenced: `__load_start_text0', `__load_stop_text0',
3917`__load_start_text1', `__load_stop_text1'.
3918
3919   C code to copy overlay `.text1' into the overlay area might look
3920like the following.
3921
3922       extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
3923       memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
3924               &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
3925
3926   Note that the `OVERLAY' command is just syntactic sugar, since
3927everything it does can be done using the more basic commands.  The above
3928example could have been written identically as follows.
3929
3930       .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) { o1/*.o(.text) }
3931       PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
3932       PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
3933       .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) { o2/*.o(.text) }
3934       PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
3935       PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
3936       . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
3937
3938
3939File: ld.info,  Node: MEMORY,  Next: PHDRS,  Prev: SECTIONS,  Up: Scripts
3940
39413.7 MEMORY Command
3942==================
3943
3944The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
3945memory.  You can override this by using the `MEMORY' command.
3946
3947   The `MEMORY' command describes the location and size of blocks of
3948memory in the target.  You can use it to describe which memory regions
3949may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid.  You
3950can then assign sections to particular memory regions.  The linker will
3951set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
3952regions that become too full.  The linker will not shuffle sections
3953around to fit into the available regions.
3954
3955   A linker script may contain at most one use of the `MEMORY' command.
3956However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as you wish.
3957The syntax is:
3958     MEMORY
3959       {
3960         NAME [(ATTR)] : ORIGIN = ORIGIN, LENGTH = LEN
3961         ...
3962       }
3963
3964   The NAME is a name used in the linker script to refer to the region.
3965The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.  Region
3966names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
3967symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each memory region must
3968have a distinct name within the `MEMORY' command.  However you can add
3969later alias names to existing memory regions with the *note
3970REGION_ALIAS:: command.
3971
3972   The ATTR string is an optional list of attributes that specify
3973whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
3974not explicitly mapped in the linker script.  As described in *note
3975SECTIONS::, if you do not specify an output section for some input
3976section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
3977the input section.  If you define region attributes, the linker will use
3978them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
3979
3980   The ATTR string must consist only of the following characters:
3981`R'
3982     Read-only section
3983
3984`W'
3985     Read/write section
3986
3987`X'
3988     Executable section
3989
3990`A'
3991     Allocatable section
3992
3993`I'
3994     Initialized section
3995
3996`L'
3997     Same as `I'
3998
3999`!'
4000     Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
4001
4002   If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4003`!', it will be placed in the memory region.  The `!' attribute
4004reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed in the
4005memory region only if it does not match any of the listed attributes.
4006
4007   The ORIGIN is an numerical expression for the start address of the
4008memory region.  The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4009cannot involve any symbols.  The keyword `ORIGIN' may be abbreviated to
4010`org' or `o' (but not, for example, `ORG').
4011
4012   The LEN is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory region.
4013As with the ORIGIN expression, the expression must be numerical only
4014and must evaluate to a constant.  The keyword `LENGTH' may be
4015abbreviated to `len' or `l'.
4016
4017   In the following example, we specify that there are two memory
4018regions available for allocation: one starting at `0' for 256 kilobytes,
4019and the other starting at `0x40000000' for four megabytes.  The linker
4020will place into the `rom' memory region every section which is not
4021explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only or
4022executable.  The linker will place other sections which are not
4023explicitly mapped into a memory region into the `ram' memory region.
4024
4025     MEMORY
4026       {
4027         rom (rx)  : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4028         ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4029       }
4030
4031   Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4032specific output sections into that memory region by using the `>REGION'
4033output section attribute.  For example, if you have a memory region
4034named `mem', you would use `>mem' in the output section definition.
4035*Note Output Section Region::.  If no address was specified for the
4036output section, the linker will set the address to the next available
4037address within the memory region.  If the combined output sections
4038directed to a memory region are too large for the region, the linker
4039will issue an error message.
4040
4041   It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4042expression via the `ORIGIN(MEMORY)' and `LENGTH(MEMORY)' functions:
4043
4044       _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4045
4046
4047File: ld.info,  Node: PHDRS,  Next: VERSION,  Prev: MEMORY,  Up: Scripts
4048
40493.8 PHDRS Command
4050=================
4051
4052The ELF object file format uses "program headers", also knows as
4053"segments".  The program headers describe how the program should be
4054loaded into memory.  You can print them out by using the `objdump'
4055program with the `-p' option.
4056
4057   When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4058reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4059program.  This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4060This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4061interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4062
4063   The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.
4064However, in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4065precisely.  You may use the `PHDRS' command for this purpose.  When the
4066linker sees the `PHDRS' command in the linker script, it will not
4067create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4068
4069   The linker only pays attention to the `PHDRS' command when
4070generating an ELF output file.  In other cases, the linker will simply
4071ignore `PHDRS'.
4072
4073   This is the syntax of the `PHDRS' command.  The words `PHDRS',
4074`FILEHDR', `AT', and `FLAGS' are keywords.
4075
4076     PHDRS
4077     {
4078       NAME TYPE [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( ADDRESS ) ]
4079             [ FLAGS ( FLAGS ) ] ;
4080     }
4081
4082   The NAME is used only for reference in the `SECTIONS' command of the
4083linker script.  It is not put into the output file.  Program header
4084names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
4085symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each program header must
4086have a distinct name.  The headers are processed in order and it is
4087usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
4088
4089   Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4090system loader will load from the file.  In the linker script, you
4091specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4092sections in the segments.  You use the `:PHDR' output section attribute
4093to place a section in a particular segment.  *Note Output Section
4094Phdr::.
4095
4096   It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment.  This
4097merely implies that one segment of memory contains another.  You may
4098repeat `:PHDR', using it once for each segment which should contain the
4099section.
4100
4101   If you place a section in one or more segments using `:PHDR', then
4102the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do not
4103specify `:PHDR' in the same segments.  This is for convenience, since
4104generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be placed in a single
4105segment.  You can use `:NONE' to override the default segment and tell
4106the linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4107
4108   You may use the `FILEHDR' and `PHDRS' keywords after the program
4109header type to further describe the contents of the segment.  The
4110`FILEHDR' keyword means that the segment should include the ELF file
4111header.  The `PHDRS' keyword means that the segment should include the
4112ELF program headers themselves.  If applied to a loadable segment
4113(`PT_LOAD'), all prior loadable segments must have one of these
4114keywords.
4115
4116   The TYPE may be one of the following.  The numbers indicate the
4117value of the keyword.
4118
4119`PT_NULL' (0)
4120     Indicates an unused program header.
4121
4122`PT_LOAD' (1)
4123     Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be
4124     loaded from the file.
4125
4126`PT_DYNAMIC' (2)
4127     Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4128
4129`PT_INTERP' (3)
4130     Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may
4131     be found.
4132
4133`PT_NOTE' (4)
4134     Indicates a segment holding note information.
4135
4136`PT_SHLIB' (5)
4137     A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the
4138     ELF ABI.
4139
4140`PT_PHDR' (6)
4141     Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4142
4143EXPRESSION
4144     An expression giving the numeric type of the program header.  This
4145     may be used for types not defined above.
4146
4147   You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular
4148address in memory by using an `AT' expression.  This is identical to the
4149`AT' command used as an output section attribute (*note Output Section
4150LMA::).  The `AT' command for a program header overrides the output
4151section attribute.
4152
4153   The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4154which comprise the segment.  You may use the `FLAGS' keyword to
4155explicitly specify the segment flags.  The value of FLAGS must be an
4156integer.  It is used to set the `p_flags' field of the program header.
4157
4158   Here is an example of `PHDRS'.  This shows a typical set of program
4159headers used on a native ELF system.
4160
4161     PHDRS
4162     {
4163       headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4164       interp PT_INTERP ;
4165       text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4166       data PT_LOAD ;
4167       dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4168     }
4169
4170     SECTIONS
4171     {
4172       . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4173       .interp : { *(.interp) } :text :interp
4174       .text : { *(.text) } :text
4175       .rodata : { *(.rodata) } /* defaults to :text */
4176       ...
4177       . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4178       .data : { *(.data) } :data
4179       .dynamic : { *(.dynamic) } :data :dynamic
4180       ...
4181     }
4182
4183
4184File: ld.info,  Node: VERSION,  Next: Expressions,  Prev: PHDRS,  Up: Scripts
4185
41863.9 VERSION Command
4187===================
4188
4189The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF.  Symbol versions are
4190only useful when using shared libraries.  The dynamic linker can use
4191symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4192a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4193shared library.
4194
4195   You can include a version script directly in the main linker script,
4196or you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script.  You
4197can also use the `--version-script' linker option.
4198
4199   The syntax of the `VERSION' command is simply
4200     VERSION { version-script-commands }
4201
4202   The format of the version script commands is identical to that used
4203by Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5.  The version script defines a tree of
4204version nodes.  You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4205version script.  You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4206version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4207scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4208library.
4209
4210   The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a
4211few examples.
4212
4213     VERS_1.1 {
4214     	 global:
4215     		 foo1;
4216     	 local:
4217     		 old*;
4218     		 original*;
4219     		 new*;
4220     };
4221
4222     VERS_1.2 {
4223     		 foo2;
4224     } VERS_1.1;
4225
4226     VERS_2.0 {
4227     		 bar1; bar2;
4228     	 extern "C++" {
4229     		 ns::*;
4230     		 "f(int, double)";
4231     	 };
4232     } VERS_1.2;
4233
4234   This example version script defines three version nodes.  The first
4235version node defined is `VERS_1.1'; it has no other dependencies.  The
4236script binds the symbol `foo1' to `VERS_1.1'.  It reduces a number of
4237symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside of the
4238shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4239symbol whose name begins with `old', `original', or `new' is matched.
4240The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used in the shell
4241when matching filenames (also known as "globbing").  However, if you
4242specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the name is treated
4243as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
4244
4245   Next, the version script defines node `VERS_1.2'.  This node depends
4246upon `VERS_1.1'.  The script binds the symbol `foo2' to the version
4247node `VERS_1.2'.
4248
4249   Finally, the version script defines node `VERS_2.0'.  This node
4250depends upon `VERS_1.2'.  The scripts binds the symbols `bar1' and
4251`bar2' are bound to the version node `VERS_2.0'.
4252
4253   When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4254specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4255unspecified base version of the library.  You can bind all otherwise
4256unspecified symbols to a given version node by using `global: *;'
4257somewhere in the version script.  Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4258wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node.  Global
4259wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4260set exported for an old version.  That's wrong since older versions
4261ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
4262
4263   The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than
4264what they might suggest to the person reading them.  The `2.0' version
4265could just as well have appeared in between `1.1' and `1.2'.  However,
4266this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4267
4268   Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node in
4269the version script.  Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4270symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and
4271which won't.
4272
4273     { global: foo; bar; local: *; };
4274
4275   When you link an application against a shared library that has
4276versioned symbols, the application itself knows which version of each
4277symbol it requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from
4278each shared library it is linked against.  Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4279loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4280linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4281application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols.  In this
4282way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4283all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4284search for each symbol reference.
4285
4286   The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4287doing minor version checking that SunOS does.  The fundamental problem
4288that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4289functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4290the application starts up.  If a shared library is out of date, a
4291required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4292that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail.  With symbol
4293versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4294the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4295
4296   There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach.  The
4297first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4298source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4299script.  This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4300maintainer.  You can do this by putting something like:
4301     __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@VERS_1.1");
4302   in the C source file.  This renames the function `original_foo' to
4303be an alias for `foo' bound to the version node `VERS_1.1'.  The
4304`local:' directive can be used to prevent the symbol `original_foo'
4305from being exported. A `.symver' directive takes precedence over a
4306version script.
4307
4308   The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4309function to appear in a given shared library.  In this way you can make
4310an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4311version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4312linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4313
4314   To do this, you must use multiple `.symver' directives in the source
4315file.  Here is an example:
4316
4317     __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@");
4318     __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@VERS_1.1");
4319     __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@VERS_1.2");
4320     __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@VERS_2.0");
4321
4322   In this example, `foo@' represents the symbol `foo' bound to the
4323unspecified base version of the symbol.  The source file that contains
4324this example would define 4 C functions: `original_foo', `old_foo',
4325`old_foo1', and `new_foo'.
4326
4327   When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to
4328be some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4329this symbol will be bound.  You can do this with the `foo@@VERS_2.0'
4330type of `.symver' directive.  You can only declare one version of a
4331symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise you would effectively
4332have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4333
4334   If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4335within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
4336(i.e., `old_foo'), or you can use the `.symver' directive to
4337specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4338
4339   You can also specify the language in the version script:
4340
4341     VERSION extern "lang" { version-script-commands }
4342
4343   The supported `lang's are `C', `C++', and `Java'.  The linker will
4344iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and demangle them
4345according to `lang' before matching them to the patterns specified in
4346`version-script-commands'.  The default `lang' is `C'.
4347
4348   Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters.  As
4349described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4350or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly.  In
4351the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4352whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4353cause a mismatch.  As the exact string generated by the demangler might
4354change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you should
4355check that all of your version directives are behaving as you expect
4356when you upgrade.
4357
4358
4359File: ld.info,  Node: Expressions,  Next: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: VERSION,  Up: Scripts
4360
43613.10 Expressions in Linker Scripts
4362==================================
4363
4364The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4365that of C expressions.  All expressions are evaluated as integers.  All
4366expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4367host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4368
4369   You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4370
4371   The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use
4372in expressions.
4373
4374* Menu:
4375
4376* Constants::			Constants
4377* Symbolic Constants::          Symbolic constants
4378* Symbols::			Symbol Names
4379* Orphan Sections::		Orphan Sections
4380* Location Counter::		The Location Counter
4381* Operators::			Operators
4382* Evaluation::			Evaluation
4383* Expression Section::		The Section of an Expression
4384* Builtin Functions::		Builtin Functions
4385
4386
4387File: ld.info,  Node: Constants,  Next: Symbolic Constants,  Up: Expressions
4388
43893.10.1 Constants
4390----------------
4391
4392All constants are integers.
4393
4394   As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with `0' to be
4395octal, and an integer beginning with `0x' or `0X' to be hexadecimal.
4396Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of `h' or `H' for
4397hexadeciaml, `o' or `O' for octal, `b' or `B' for binary and `d' or `D'
4398for decimal.  Any integer value without a prefix or a suffix is
4399considered to be decimal.
4400
4401   In addition, you can use the suffixes `K' and `M' to scale a
4402constant by `1024' or `1024*1024' respectively.  For example, the
4403following all refer to the same quantity:
4404
4405     _fourk_1 = 4K;
4406     _fourk_2 = 4096;
4407     _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
4408     _fourk_4 = 10000o;
4409
4410   Note - the `K' and `M' suffixes cannot be used in conjunction with
4411the base suffixes mentioned above.
4412
4413
4414File: ld.info,  Node: Symbolic Constants,  Next: Symbols,  Prev: Constants,  Up: Expressions
4415
44163.10.2 Symbolic Constants
4417-------------------------
4418
4419It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of the
4420`CONSTANT(NAME)' operator, where NAME is one of:
4421
4422`MAXPAGESIZE'
4423     The target's maximum page size.
4424
4425`COMMONPAGESIZE'
4426     The target's default page size.
4427
4428   So for example:
4429
4430       .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : { *(.text) }
4431
4432   will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
4433supported by the target.
4434
4435
4436File: ld.info,  Node: Symbols,  Next: Orphan Sections,  Prev: Symbolic Constants,  Up: Expressions
4437
44383.10.3 Symbol Names
4439-------------------
4440
4441Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
4442and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
4443Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords.  You can
4444specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
4445keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
4446     "SECTION" = 9;
4447     "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
4448
4449   Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is
4450safest to delimit symbols with spaces.  For example, `A-B' is one
4451symbol, whereas `A - B' is an expression involving subtraction.
4452
4453
4454File: ld.info,  Node: Orphan Sections,  Next: Location Counter,  Prev: Symbols,  Up: Expressions
4455
44563.10.4 Orphan Sections
4457----------------------
4458
4459Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which are not
4460explicitly placed into the output file by the linker script.  The
4461linker will still copy these sections into the output file, but it has
4462to guess as to where they should be placed.  The linker uses a simple
4463heuristic to do this.  It attempts to place orphan sections after
4464non-orphan sections of the same attribute, such as code vs data,
4465loadable vs non-loadable, etc.  If there is not enough room to do this
4466then it places at the end of the file.
4467
4468   For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type
4469as well as section flag.
4470
4471   If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
4472the linker will automatically *note PROVIDE:: two symbols:
4473__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
4474section.  These indicate the start address and end address of the
4475orphaned section respectively.  Note: most section names are not
4476representable as C identifiers because they contain a `.' character.
4477
4478
4479File: ld.info,  Node: Location Counter,  Next: Operators,  Prev: Orphan Sections,  Up: Expressions
4480
44813.10.5 The Location Counter
4482---------------------------
4483
4484The special linker variable "dot" `.' always contains the current
4485output location counter.  Since the `.' always refers to a location in
4486an output section, it may only appear in an expression within a
4487`SECTIONS' command.  The `.' symbol may appear anywhere that an
4488ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
4489
4490   Assigning a value to `.' will cause the location counter to be
4491moved.  This may be used to create holes in the output section.  The
4492location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
4493and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so doing
4494creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
4495
4496     SECTIONS
4497     {
4498       output :
4499         {
4500           file1(.text)
4501           . = . + 1000;
4502           file2(.text)
4503           . += 1000;
4504           file3(.text)
4505         } = 0x12345678;
4506     }
4507   In the previous example, the `.text' section from `file1' is located
4508at the beginning of the output section `output'.  It is followed by a
45091000 byte gap.  Then the `.text' section from `file2' appears, also
4510with a 1000 byte gap following before the `.text' section from `file3'.
4511The notation `= 0x12345678' specifies what data to write in the gaps
4512(*note Output Section Fill::).
4513
4514   Note: `.' actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
4515current containing object.  Normally this is the `SECTIONS' statement,
4516whose start address is 0, hence `.' can be used as an absolute address.
4517If `.' is used inside a section description however, it refers to the
4518byte offset from the start of that section, not an absolute address.
4519Thus in a script like this:
4520
4521     SECTIONS
4522     {
4523         . = 0x100
4524         .text: {
4525           *(.text)
4526           . = 0x200
4527         }
4528         . = 0x500
4529         .data: {
4530           *(.data)
4531           . += 0x600
4532         }
4533     }
4534
4535   The `.text' section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100 and
4536a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in the
4537`.text' input sections to fill this area.  (If there is too much data,
4538an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to move `.'
4539backwards).  The `.data' section will start at 0x500 and it will have
4540an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of the values from
4541the `.data' input sections and before the end of the `.data' output
4542section itself.
4543
4544   Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
4545output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
4546needs to place orphan sections.  For example, given the following:
4547
4548     SECTIONS
4549     {
4550         start_of_text = . ;
4551         .text: { *(.text) }
4552         end_of_text = . ;
4553
4554         start_of_data = . ;
4555         .data: { *(.data) }
4556         end_of_data = . ;
4557     }
4558
4559   If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. `.rodata', not
4560mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section between
4561`.text' and `.data'.  You might think the linker should place `.rodata'
4562on the blank line in the above script, but blank lines are of no
4563particular significance to the linker.  As well, the linker doesn't
4564associate the above symbol names with their sections.  Instead, it
4565assumes that all assignments or other statements belong to the previous
4566output section, except for the special case of an assignment to `.'.
4567I.e., the linker will place the orphan `.rodata' section as if the
4568script was written as follows:
4569
4570     SECTIONS
4571     {
4572         start_of_text = . ;
4573         .text: { *(.text) }
4574         end_of_text = . ;
4575
4576         start_of_data = . ;
4577         .rodata: { *(.rodata) }
4578         .data: { *(.data) }
4579         end_of_data = . ;
4580     }
4581
4582   This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
4583`start_of_data'.  One way to influence the orphan section placement is
4584to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker assumes that an
4585assignment to `.' is setting the start address of a following output
4586section and thus should be grouped with that section.  So you could
4587write:
4588
4589     SECTIONS
4590     {
4591         start_of_text = . ;
4592         .text: { *(.text) }
4593         end_of_text = . ;
4594
4595         . = . ;
4596         start_of_data = . ;
4597         .data: { *(.data) }
4598         end_of_data = . ;
4599     }
4600
4601   Now, the orphan `.rodata' section will be placed between
4602`end_of_text' and `start_of_data'.
4603
4604
4605File: ld.info,  Node: Operators,  Next: Evaluation,  Prev: Location Counter,  Up: Expressions
4606
46073.10.6 Operators
4608----------------
4609
4610The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
4611the standard bindings and precedence levels:
4612     precedence      associativity   Operators                Notes
4613     (highest)
4614     1               left            !  -  ~                  (1)
4615     2               left            *  /  %
4616     3               left            +  -
4617     4               left            >>  <<
4618     5               left            ==  !=  >  <  <=  >=
4619     6               left            &
4620     7               left            |
4621     8               left            &&
4622     9               left            ||
4623     10              right           ? :
4624     11              right           &=  +=  -=  *=  /=       (2)
4625     (lowest)
4626   Notes: (1) Prefix operators (2) *Note Assignments::.
4627
4628
4629File: ld.info,  Node: Evaluation,  Next: Expression Section,  Prev: Operators,  Up: Expressions
4630
46313.10.7 Evaluation
4632-----------------
4633
4634The linker evaluates expressions lazily.  It only computes the value of
4635an expression when absolutely necessary.
4636
4637   The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
4638address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
4639regions, in order to do any linking at all.  These values are computed
4640as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
4641
4642   However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
4643until after storage allocation.  Such values are evaluated later, when
4644other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
4645for use in the symbol assignment expression.
4646
4647   The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
4648assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
4649allocation.
4650
4651   Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
4652`.', must be evaluated during section allocation.
4653
4654   If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
4655available, then an error results.  For example, a script like the
4656following
4657     SECTIONS
4658       {
4659         .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
4660           { *(.text) }
4661       }
4662will cause the error message `non constant expression for initial
4663address'.
4664
4665
4666File: ld.info,  Node: Expression Section,  Next: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Evaluation,  Up: Expressions
4667
46683.10.8 The Section of an Expression
4669-----------------------------------
4670
4671Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute.  A section
4672relative symbol is relocatable.  If you request relocatable output
4673using the `-r' option, a further link operation may change the value of
4674a section relative symbol.  On the other hand, an absolute symbol will
4675retain the same value throughout any further link operations.
4676
4677   Some terms in linker expressions are addresses.  This is true of
4678section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
4679address, such as `ADDR', `LOADADDR', `ORIGIN' and `SEGMENT_START'.
4680Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin functions that return a
4681non-address value, such as `LENGTH'.  One complication is that unless
4682you set `LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")' (*note Miscellaneous Commands::),
4683numbers and absolute symbols are treated differently depending on their
4684location, for compatibility with older versions of `ld'.  Expressions
4685appearing outside an output section definition treat all numbers as
4686absolute addresses.  Expressions appearing inside an output section
4687definition treat absolute symbols as numbers.  If `LD_FEATURE
4688("SANE_EXPR")' is given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply
4689treated as numbers everywhere.
4690
4691   In the following simple example,
4692
4693     SECTIONS
4694       {
4695         . = 0x100;
4696         __executable_start = 0x100;
4697         .data :
4698         {
4699           . = 0x10;
4700           __data_start = 0x10;
4701           *(.data)
4702         }
4703         ...
4704       }
4705
4706   both `.' and `__executable_start' are set to the absolute address
47070x100 in the first two assignments, then both `.' and `__data_start'
4708are set to 0x10 relative to the `.data' section in the second two
4709assignments.
4710
4711   For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
4712addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
4713
4714   * Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on
4715     two relative addresses in the same section or between one relative
4716     address and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the
4717     address(es).
4718
4719   * Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on
4720     one or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in
4721     the same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an
4722     absolute address before applying the operator.
4723
4724   The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
4725
4726   * An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
4727
4728   * The result of comparisons, `&&' and `||' is also a number.
4729
4730   * The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
4731     relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresess
4732     (after above conversions) is also a number.
4733
4734   * The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
4735     relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
4736     section as the relative operand(s).
4737
4738   * The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
4739     conversions) is an absolute address.
4740
4741   You can use the builtin function `ABSOLUTE' to force an expression
4742to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative.  For example, to
4743create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
4744section `.data':
4745     SECTIONS
4746       {
4747         .data : { *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); }
4748       }
4749   If `ABSOLUTE' were not used, `_edata' would be relative to the
4750`.data' section.
4751
4752   Using `LOADADDR' also forces an expression absolute, since this
4753particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
4754
4755
4756File: ld.info,  Node: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Expression Section,  Up: Expressions
4757
47583.10.9 Builtin Functions
4759------------------------
4760
4761The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
4762use in linker script expressions.
4763
4764`ABSOLUTE(EXP)'
4765     Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative)
4766     value of the expression EXP.  Primarily useful to assign an
4767     absolute value to a symbol within a section definition, where
4768     symbol values are normally section relative.  *Note Expression
4769     Section::.
4770
4771`ADDR(SECTION)'
4772     Return the address (VMA) of the named SECTION.  Your script must
4773     previously have defined the location of that section.  In the
4774     following example, `start_of_output_1', `symbol_1' and `symbol_2'
4775     are assigned equivalent values, except that `symbol_1' will be
4776     relative to the `.output1' section while the other two will be
4777     absolute:
4778          SECTIONS { ...
4779            .output1 :
4780              {
4781              start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
4782              ...
4783              }
4784            .output :
4785              {
4786              symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
4787              symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
4788              }
4789          ... }
4790
4791`ALIGN(ALIGN)'
4792`ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN)'
4793     Return the location counter (`.') or arbitrary expression aligned
4794     to the next ALIGN boundary.  The single operand `ALIGN' doesn't
4795     change the value of the location counter--it just does arithmetic
4796     on it.  The two operand `ALIGN' allows an arbitrary expression to
4797     be aligned upwards (`ALIGN(ALIGN)' is equivalent to `ALIGN(.,
4798     ALIGN)').
4799
4800     Here is an example which aligns the output `.data' section to the
4801     next `0x2000' byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
4802     variable within the section to the next `0x8000' boundary after the
4803     input sections:
4804          SECTIONS { ...
4805            .data ALIGN(0x2000): {
4806              *(.data)
4807              variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
4808            }
4809          ... }
4810     The first use of `ALIGN' in this example specifies the location of
4811     a section because it is used as the optional ADDRESS attribute of
4812     a section definition (*note Output Section Address::).  The second
4813     use of `ALIGN' is used to defines the value of a symbol.
4814
4815     The builtin function `NEXT' is closely related to `ALIGN'.
4816
4817`ALIGNOF(SECTION)'
4818     Return the alignment in bytes of the named SECTION, if that
4819     section has been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated
4820     when this is evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the
4821     following example, the alignment of the `.output' section is
4822     stored as the first value in that section.
4823          SECTIONS{ ...
4824            .output {
4825              LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
4826              ...
4827              }
4828          ... }
4829
4830`BLOCK(EXP)'
4831     This is a synonym for `ALIGN', for compatibility with older linker
4832     scripts.  It is most often seen when setting the address of an
4833     output section.
4834
4835`DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE)'
4836     This is equivalent to either
4837          (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - 1)))
4838     or
4839          (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - COMMONPAGESIZE)))
4840     depending on whether the latter uses fewer COMMONPAGESIZE sized
4841     pages for the data segment (area between the result of this
4842     expression and `DATA_SEGMENT_END') than the former or not.  If the
4843     latter form is used, it means COMMONPAGESIZE bytes of runtime
4844     memory will be saved at the expense of up to COMMONPAGESIZE wasted
4845     bytes in the on-disk file.
4846
4847     This expression can only be used directly in `SECTIONS' commands,
4848     not in any output section descriptions and only once in the linker
4849     script.  COMMONPAGESIZE should be less or equal to MAXPAGESIZE and
4850     should be the system page size the object wants to be optimized
4851     for (while still working on system page sizes up to MAXPAGESIZE).
4852
4853     Example:
4854            . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
4855
4856`DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP)'
4857     This defines the end of data segment for `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN'
4858     evaluation purposes.
4859
4860            . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
4861
4862`DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP)'
4863     This defines the end of the `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment when `-z relro'
4864     option is used.  Second argument is returned.  When `-z relro'
4865     option is not present, `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END' does nothing,
4866     otherwise `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' is padded so that EXP + OFFSET is
4867     aligned to the most commonly used page boundary for particular
4868     target.  If present in the linker script, it must always come in
4869     between `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' and `DATA_SEGMENT_END'.
4870
4871            . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
4872
4873`DEFINED(SYMBOL)'
4874     Return 1 if SYMBOL is in the linker global symbol table and is
4875     defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
4876     return 0.  You can use this function to provide default values for
4877     symbols.  For example, the following script fragment shows how to
4878     set a global symbol `begin' to the first location in the `.text'
4879     section--but if a symbol called `begin' already existed, its value
4880     is preserved:
4881
4882          SECTIONS { ...
4883            .text : {
4884              begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
4885              ...
4886            }
4887            ...
4888          }
4889
4890`LENGTH(MEMORY)'
4891     Return the length of the memory region named MEMORY.
4892
4893`LOADADDR(SECTION)'
4894     Return the absolute LMA of the named SECTION.  (*note Output
4895     Section LMA::).
4896
4897`MAX(EXP1, EXP2)'
4898     Returns the maximum of EXP1 and EXP2.
4899
4900`MIN(EXP1, EXP2)'
4901     Returns the minimum of EXP1 and EXP2.
4902
4903`NEXT(EXP)'
4904     Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of EXP.
4905     This function is closely related to `ALIGN(EXP)'; unless you use
4906     the `MEMORY' command to define discontinuous memory for the output
4907     file, the two functions are equivalent.
4908
4909`ORIGIN(MEMORY)'
4910     Return the origin of the memory region named MEMORY.
4911
4912`SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT)'
4913     Return the base address of the named SEGMENT.  If an explicit
4914     value has been given for this segment (with a command-line `-T'
4915     option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
4916     DEFAULT.  At present, the `-T' command-line option can only be
4917     used to set the base address for the "text", "data", and "bss"
4918     sections, but you can use `SEGMENT_START' with any segment name.
4919
4920`SIZEOF(SECTION)'
4921     Return the size in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section has
4922     been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when this is
4923     evaluated, the linker will report an error.  In the following
4924     example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned identical values:
4925          SECTIONS{ ...
4926            .output {
4927              .start = . ;
4928              ...
4929              .end = . ;
4930              }
4931            symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
4932            symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
4933          ... }
4934
4935`SIZEOF_HEADERS'
4936`sizeof_headers'
4937     Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers.  This is
4938     information which appears at the start of the output file.  You
4939     can use this number when setting the start address of the first
4940     section, if you choose, to facilitate paging.
4941
4942     When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
4943     `SIZEOF_HEADERS' builtin function, the linker must compute the
4944     number of program headers before it has determined all the section
4945     addresses and sizes.  If the linker later discovers that it needs
4946     additional program headers, it will report an error `not enough
4947     room for program headers'.  To avoid this error, you must avoid
4948     using the `SIZEOF_HEADERS' function, or you must rework your linker
4949     script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program
4950     headers, or you must define the program headers yourself using the
4951     `PHDRS' command (*note PHDRS::).
4952
4953
4954File: ld.info,  Node: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: Expressions,  Up: Scripts
4955
49563.11 Implicit Linker Scripts
4957============================
4958
4959If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
4960an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
4961linker script.  If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
4962linker will report an error.
4963
4964   An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
4965
4966   Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
4967assignments, or the `INPUT', `GROUP', or `VERSION' commands.
4968
4969   Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be
4970read at the position in the command line where the implicit linker
4971script was read.  This can affect archive searching.
4972
4973
4974File: ld.info,  Node: Machine Dependent,  Next: BFD,  Prev: Scripts,  Up: Top
4975
49764 Machine Dependent Features
4977****************************
4978
4979`ld' has additional features on some platforms; the following sections
4980describe them.  Machines where `ld' has no additional functionality are
4981not listed.
4982
4983* Menu:
4984
4985
4986* H8/300::                      `ld' and the H8/300
4987
4988* i960::                        `ld' and the Intel 960 family
4989
4990* ARM::				`ld' and the ARM family
4991
4992* HPPA ELF32::                  `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF
4993
4994* M68K::			`ld' and the Motorola 68K family
4995
4996* MIPS::			`ld' and the MIPS family
4997
4998* MMIX::			`ld' and MMIX
4999
5000* MSP430::			`ld' and MSP430
5001
5002* M68HC11/68HC12::		`ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5003
5004* PowerPC ELF32::		`ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5005
5006* PowerPC64 ELF64::		`ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5007
5008* SPU ELF::			`ld' and SPU ELF Support
5009
5010* TI COFF::                     `ld' and TI COFF
5011
5012* WIN32::                       `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5013
5014* Xtensa::                      `ld' and Xtensa Processors
5015
5016
5017File: ld.info,  Node: H8/300,  Next: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
5018
50194.1 `ld' and the H8/300
5020=======================
5021
5022For the H8/300, `ld' can perform these global optimizations when you
5023specify the `--relax' command-line option.
5024
5025_relaxing address modes_
5026     `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
5027     within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
5028     relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
5029
5030_synthesizing instructions_
5031     `ld' finds all `mov.b' instructions which use the sixteen-bit
5032     absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
5033     changes them to use the eight-bit address form.  (That is: the
5034     linker turns `mov.b `@'AA:16' into `mov.b `@'AA:8' whenever the
5035     address AA is in the top page of memory).
5036
5037_bit manipulation instructions_
5038     `ld' finds all bit manipulation instructions like `band, bclr,
5039     biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst,
5040     bxor' which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer
5041     to the top page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit
5042     address form.  (That is: the linker turns `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:32'
5043     into `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:8' whenever the address AA is in the top
5044     page of memory).
5045
5046_system control instructions_
5047     `ld' finds all `ldc.w, stc.w' instructions which use the 32 bit
5048     absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
5049     changes them to use 16 bit address form.  (That is: the linker
5050     turns `ldc.w `@'AA:32,ccr' into `ldc.w `@'AA:16,ccr' whenever the
5051     address AA is in the top page of memory).
5052
5053
5054File: ld.info,  Node: i960,  Next: ARM,  Prev: H8/300,  Up: Machine Dependent
5055
50564.2 `ld' and the Intel 960 Family
5057=================================
5058
5059You can use the `-AARCHITECTURE' command line option to specify one of
5060the two-letter names identifying members of the 960 family; the option
5061specifies the desired output target, and warns of any incompatible
5062instructions in the input files.  It also modifies the linker's search
5063strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of libraries
5064specific to each particular architecture, by including in the search
5065loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5066
5067   For example, if your `ld' command line included `-ACA' as well as
5068`-ltry', the linker would look (in its built-in search paths, and in
5069any paths you specify with `-L') for a library with the names
5070
5071     try
5072     libtry.a
5073     tryca
5074     libtryca.a
5075
5076The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5077two are due to the use of `-ACA'.
5078
5079   You can meaningfully use `-A' more than once on a command line, since
5080the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures;
5081each use will add another pair of name variants to search for when `-l'
5082specifies a library.
5083
5084   `ld' supports the `--relax' option for the i960 family.  If you
5085specify `--relax', `ld' finds all `balx' and `calx' instructions whose
5086targets are within 24 bits, and turns them into 24-bit program-counter
5087relative `bal' and `cal' instructions, respectively.  `ld' also turns
5088`cal' instructions into `bal' instructions when it determines that the
5089target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5090not itself call any subroutines).
5091
5092   The `--fix-cortex-a8' switch enables a link-time workaround for an
5093erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors.  The workaround is enabled by
5094default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile.  It can
5095be enabled otherwise by specifying `--fix-cortex-a8', or disabled
5096unconditionally by specifying `--no-fix-cortex-a8'.
5097
5098   The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code.  Please contact ARM for
5099further details.
5100
5101   The `--no-merge-exidx-entries' switch disables the merging of
5102adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
5103
5104
5105File: ld.info,  Node: M68HC11/68HC12,  Next: PowerPC ELF32,  Prev: MSP430,  Up: Machine Dependent
5106
51074.3 `ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5108====================================================
5109
51104.3.1 Linker Relaxation
5111-----------------------
5112
5113For the Motorola 68HC11, `ld' can perform these global optimizations
5114when you specify the `--relax' command-line option.
5115
5116_relaxing address modes_
5117     `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
5118     within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
5119     relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
5120
5121     `ld' also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5122     transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5123     page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5124
5125_relaxing gcc instruction group_
5126     When `gcc' is called with `-mrelax', it can emit group of
5127     instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5128     addressing mode. These instructions consists of `bclr' or `bset'
5129     instructions.
5130
5131
51324.3.2 Trampoline Generation
5133---------------------------
5134
5135For 68HC11 and 68HC12, `ld' can generate trampoline code to call a far
5136function using a normal `jsr' instruction. The linker will also change
5137the relocation to some far function to use the trampoline address
5138instead of the function address. This is typically the case when a
5139pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact point to the
5140function trampoline.
5141
5142
5143File: ld.info,  Node: ARM,  Next: HPPA ELF32,  Prev: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
5144
51454.4 `ld' and the ARM family
5146===========================
5147
5148For the ARM, `ld' will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
5149between ARM and Thumb code.  These stubs only work with code that has
5150been compiled and assembled with the `-mthumb-interwork' command line
5151option.  If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5152libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5153option then the `--support-old-code' command line switch should be
5154given to the linker.  This will make it generate larger stub functions
5155which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code.  Note, however,
5156the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5157non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5158
5159   The `--thumb-entry' switch is a duplicate of the generic `--entry'
5160switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.  But it also
5161sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be branched to using
5162a BX instruction, and the program will start executing in Thumb mode
5163straight away.
5164
5165   The `--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables' switch is specifying, that
5166the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
5167elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
5168import tables. By default this option is turned off.
5169
5170   The `--be8' switch instructs `ld' to generate BE8 format
5171executables.  This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5172The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5173
5174   The `R_ARM_TARGET1' relocation is typically used for entries in the
5175`.init_array' section.  It is interpreted as either `R_ARM_REL32' or
5176`R_ARM_ABS32', depending on the target.  The `--target1-rel' and
5177`--target1-abs' switches override the default.
5178
5179   The `--target2=type' switch overrides the default definition of the
5180`R_ARM_TARGET2' relocation.  Valid values for `type', their meanings,
5181and target defaults are as follows:
5182`rel'
5183     `R_ARM_REL32' (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5184
5185`abs'
5186     `R_ARM_ABS32' (arm*-*-symbianelf)
5187
5188`got-rel'
5189     `R_ARM_GOT_PREL' (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5190
5191   The `R_ARM_V4BX' relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF specification)
5192enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5193interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t,
5194but also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4
5195objects.
5196
5197   In the latter case, the switch `--fix-v4bx' must be passed to the
5198linker, which causes v4t `BX rM' instructions to be rewritten as `MOV
5199PC,rM', since v4 processors do not have a `BX' instruction.
5200
5201   In the former case, the switch should not be used, and `R_ARM_V4BX'
5202relocations are ignored.
5203
5204   Replace `BX rM' instructions identified by `R_ARM_V4BX' relocations
5205with a branch to the following veneer:
5206
5207     TST rM, #1
5208     MOVEQ PC, rM
5209     BX Rn
5210
5211   This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4
5212cores and are still interworking safe.  Note that the above veneer
5213clobbers the condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in
5214rare cases.
5215
5216   The `--use-blx' switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb BLX
5217instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various situations.
5218Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb code using
5219BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before each PLT
5220entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
5221
5222   This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need
5223to specify it if you are using that target.
5224
5225   The `--vfp11-denorm-fix' switch enables a link-time workaround for a
5226bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
5227instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support
5228code) to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions
5229before the support code can read the intended values.
5230
5231   The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
5232intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a
5233register and another instruction which writes to the same register, or
5234at least two intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug
5235only affects full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this
5236workaround if you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for
5237further details.
5238
5239   This workaround is enabled for scalar code by default for pre-ARMv7
5240architectures, but disabled by default for later architectures. If you
5241know you are not using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can disable the
5242workaround by specifying the linker option `--vfp-denorm-fix=none'. If
5243you are using VFP vector mode, you should specify
5244`--vfp-denorm-fix=vector'.
5245
5246   If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
5247potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
5248such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
5249first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
5250instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
5251the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
5252are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
5253
5254   The `--fix-arm1176' switch enables a link-time workaround for an
5255erratum in certain ARM1176 processors.  The workaround is enabled by
5256default if you are targetting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier.
5257It can be disabled unconditionally by specifying `--no-fix-arm1176'.
5258
5259   Further information is available in the "ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
5260Programmer Advice Notice" available on the ARM documentaion website at:
5261http://infocenter.arm.com/.
5262
5263   The `--no-enum-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from warning
5264when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI enumeration
5265size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled, linking of an
5266object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another using
5267enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will not be
5268diagnosed.
5269
5270   The `--no-wchar-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from
5271warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5272`wchar_t' size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled,
5273linking of an object file using 32-bit `wchar_t' values with another
5274using 16-bit `wchar_t' values will not be diagnosed.
5275
5276   The `--pic-veneer' switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
5277ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary is not
5278PIC.  This avoids problems on uClinux targets where `--emit-relocs' is
5279used to generate relocatable binaries.
5280
5281   The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
5282code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
5283perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away.  The
5284placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
5285controlled by the command line option `--stub-group-size=N'.  The
5286placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
5287duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw.  The linker will try to
5288group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
5289code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
5290where they should be placed.
5291
5292   The value of `N', the parameter to the `--stub-group-size=' option
5293controls where the stub groups are placed.  If it is negative then all
5294stubs are placed after the first branch that needs them.  If it is
5295positive then the stubs can be placed either before or after the
5296branches that need them.  If the value of `N' is 1 (either +1 or -1)
5297then the linker will choose exactly where to place groups of stubs,
5298using its built in heuristics.  A value of `N' greater than 1 (or
5299smaller than -1) tells the linker that a single group of stubs can
5300service at most `N' bytes from the input sections.
5301
5302   The default, if `--stub-group-size=' is not specified, is `N = +1'.
5303
5304   Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
5305only, because it relies on object files properties not present
5306otherwise.
5307
5308   The `--fix-cortex-a8' switch enables a link-time workaround for an
5309erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors.  The workaround is enabled by
5310default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile.  It can
5311be enabled otherwise by specifying `--fix-cortex-a8', or disabled
5312unconditionally by specifying `--no-fix-cortex-a8'.
5313
5314   The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code.  Please contact ARM for
5315further details.
5316
5317
5318File: ld.info,  Node: HPPA ELF32,  Next: M68K,  Prev: ARM,  Up: Machine Dependent
5319
53204.5 `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
5321====================================
5322
5323When generating a shared library, `ld' will by default generate import
5324stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.  The
5325`--multi-subspace' switch causes `ld' to generate export stubs, and
5326different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with multiple
5327sub-spaces.
5328
5329   Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by `ld' in stub
5330sections located between groups of input sections.  `--stub-group-size'
5331specifies the maximum size of a group of input sections handled by one
5332stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed, a stub section may
5333serve two groups of input sections, one group before the stub section,
5334and one group after it.  However, when using conditional branches that
5335require stubs, it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub
5336sections only serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for
5337`N' chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
5338negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1' and
5339`-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input section
5340groups for the branch types detected, with the same behaviour regarding
5341stub placement as other positive or negative values of `N' respectively.
5342
5343   Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
5344single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
5345create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too
5346large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
5347
5348
5349File: ld.info,  Node: M68K,  Next: MIPS,  Prev: HPPA ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
5350
53514.6 `ld' and the Motorola 68K family
5352====================================
5353
5354The `--got=TYPE' option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.  The
5355choices are `single', `negative', `multigot' and `target'.  When
5356`target' is selected the linker chooses the default GOT generation
5357scheme for the current target.  `single' tells the linker to generate a
5358single GOT with entries only at non-negative offsets.  `negative'
5359instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with entries at both
5360negative and positive offsets.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
5361`multigot' allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the output
5362file.  All GOT references from a single input object file access the
5363same GOT, but references from different input object files might access
5364different GOTs.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
5365
5366
5367File: ld.info,  Node: MIPS,  Next: MMIX,  Prev: M68K,  Up: Machine Dependent
5368
53694.7 `ld' and the MIPS family
5370============================
5371
5372The `--insn32' and `--no-insn32' options control the choice of
5373microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as
5374that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation.  If `--insn32'
5375is used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings.  By
5376default or if `--no-insn32' is used, all instruction encodings are used,
5377including 16-bit ones where possible.
5378
5379
5380File: ld.info,  Node: MMIX,  Next: MSP430,  Prev: MIPS,  Up: Machine Dependent
5381
53824.8 `ld' and MMIX
5383=================
5384
5385For MMIX, there is a choice of generating `ELF' object files or `mmo'
5386object files when linking.  The simulator `mmix' understands the `mmo'
5387format.  The binutils `objcopy' utility can translate between the two
5388formats.
5389
5390   There is one special section, the `.MMIX.reg_contents' section.
5391Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
5392registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special
5393symbols, equal to registers.  In a final link, the start address of the
5394`.MMIX.reg_contents' section corresponds to the first allocated global
5395register multiplied by 8.  Register `$255' is not included in this
5396section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the symbol
5397`Main' for `mmo' files.
5398
5399   Global symbols with the prefix `__.MMIX.start.', for example
5400`__.MMIX.start..text' and `__.MMIX.start..data' are special.  The
5401default linker script uses these to set the default start address of a
5402section.
5403
5404   Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a
5405section, are left out from an mmo file.
5406
5407
5408File: ld.info,  Node: MSP430,  Next: M68HC11/68HC12,  Prev: MMIX,  Up: Machine Dependent
5409
54104.9 `ld' and MSP430
5411===================
5412
5413For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture.  The flag
5414`-m [mpu type]' will select an appropriate linker script for selected
5415MPU type.  (To get a list of known MPUs just pass `-m help' option to
5416the linker).
5417
5418   The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430
5419specific:
5420
5421``.vectors''
5422     Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
5423
5424``.bootloader''
5425     Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable).  Any
5426     code in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5427
5428``.infomem''
5429     Defines an information memory section (if applicable).  Any code in
5430     this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5431
5432``.infomemnobits''
5433     This is the same as the `.infomem' section except that any code in
5434     this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
5435
5436``.noinit''
5437     Denotes a portion of RAM located above `.bss' section.
5438
5439     The last two sections are used by gcc.
5440
5441
5442File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC ELF32,  Next: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Prev: M68HC11/68HC12,  Up: Machine Dependent
5443
54444.10 `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5445========================================
5446
5447Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
5448displacement, which may result in `ld' giving `relocation truncated to
5449fit' errors with very large programs.  `--relax' enables the generation
5450of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space.  These
5451trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
5452be reachable if an input section exceeds 33M in size.  You may combine
5453`-r' and `--relax' to add trampolines in a partial link.  In that case
5454both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
5455considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
5456
5457`--bss-plt'
5458     Current PowerPC GCC accepts a `-msecure-plt' option that generates
5459     code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has the
5460     security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
5461     writable and no writable section ever being executable.  PowerPC
5462     `ld' will generate this layout, including stubs to access the PLT,
5463     if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
5464     compiled with `-msecure-plt'.  `--bss-plt' forces the old BSS PLT
5465     (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
5466
5467`--secure-plt'
5468     `ld' will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
5469     `-fpic' or `-fPIC' code, but does not do so automatically when
5470     linking non-PIC code.  This option requests the new PLT and GOT
5471     layout.  A warning will be given if some object file requires the
5472     old style BSS PLT.
5473
5474`--sdata-got'
5475     The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
5476     sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement.  The
5477     location of `.plt' must change because the new secure PLT is an
5478     initialized section while the old PLT is uninitialized.  The
5479     reason for the `.got' change is more subtle:  The new placement
5480     allows `.got' to be read-only in applications linked with `-z
5481     relro -z now'.  However, this placement means that `.sdata' cannot
5482     always be used in shared libraries, because the PowerPC ABI
5483     accesses `.sdata' in shared libraries from the GOT pointer.
5484     `--sdata-got' forces the old GOT placement.  PowerPC GCC doesn't
5485     use `.sdata' in shared libraries, so this option is really only
5486     useful for other compilers that may do so.
5487
5488`--emit-stub-syms'
5489     This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
5490     that encodes the stub type and destination.
5491
5492`--no-tls-optimize'
5493     PowerPC `ld' normally performs some optimization of code sequences
5494     used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to disable
5495     the optimization.
5496
5497
5498File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Next: SPU ELF,  Prev: PowerPC ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
5499
55004.11 `ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5501==========================================
5502
5503`--stub-group-size'
5504     Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs  and TOC adjusting stubs are
5505     placed by `ld' in stub sections located between groups of input
5506     sections.  `--stub-group-size' specifies the maximum size of a
5507     group of input sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch
5508     offsets are signed, a stub section may serve two groups of input
5509     sections, one group before the stub section, and one group after
5510     it.  However, when using conditional branches that require stubs,
5511     it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
5512     serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for `N'
5513     chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
5514     negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1'
5515     and `-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input
5516     section groups for the branch types detected, with the same
5517     behaviour regarding stub placement as other positive or negative
5518     values of `N' respectively.
5519
5520     Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
5521     single input section larger than the group size specified will of
5522     course create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections
5523     are too large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its
5524     stub.
5525
5526`--emit-stub-syms'
5527     This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
5528     that encodes the stub type and destination.
5529
5530`--dotsyms, --no-dotsyms'
5531     These two options control how `ld' interprets version patterns in
5532     a version script.  Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
5533     function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and
5534     a code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (`.').  To
5535     properly version a function `foo', the version script thus needs
5536     to control both `foo' and `.foo'.  The option `--dotsyms', on by
5537     default, automatically adds the required dot-prefixed patterns.
5538     Use `--no-dotsyms' to disable this feature.
5539
5540`--no-tls-optimize'
5541     PowerPC64 `ld' normally performs some optimization of code
5542     sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to
5543     disable the optimization.
5544
5545`--no-opd-optimize'
5546     PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes `.opd' section entries
5547     corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed
5548     by the action of `--gc-sections' or linker script `/DISCARD/'.
5549     Use this option to disable `.opd' optimization.
5550
5551`--non-overlapping-opd'
5552     Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
5553     `.opd' entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
5554     the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the
5555     next entry.  This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
5556
5557`--no-toc-optimize'
5558     PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes unused `.toc' section entries.
5559     Such entries are detected by examining relocations that reference
5560     the TOC in code sections.  A reloc in a deleted code section marks
5561     a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section marks
5562     a TOC word as needed.  Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
5563     relocs are also examined.  TOC words marked as both needed and
5564     unneeded will of course be kept.  TOC words without any referencing
5565     reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
5566     discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word.  This works
5567     reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if
5568     assembly code is used to insert TOC entries.  Use this option to
5569     disable the optimization.
5570
5571`--no-multi-toc'
5572     By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
5573     entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2.  This limits the
5574     total TOC size to 64K.  PowerPC64 `ld' extends this limit by
5575     grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for
5576     its TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between
5577     inter-group calls.  `ld' does not split apart input sections, so
5578     cannot help if a single input file has a `.toc' section that
5579     exceeds 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with `ld -r'.
5580     Use this option to turn off this feature.
5581
5582
5583File: ld.info,  Node: SPU ELF,  Next: TI COFF,  Prev: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Up: Machine Dependent
5584
55854.12 `ld' and SPU ELF Support
5586=============================
5587
5588`--plugin'
5589     This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
5590
5591`--no-overlays'
5592     Normally, `ld' recognizes calls to functions within overlay
5593     regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
5594     `ld' also provides a built-in overlay manager.  This option turns
5595     off all this special overlay handling.
5596
5597`--emit-stub-syms'
5598     This option causes `ld' to label overlay stubs with a local symbol
5599     that encodes the stub type and destination.
5600
5601`--extra-overlay-stubs'
5602     This option causes `ld' to add overlay call stubs on all function
5603     calls out of overlay regions.  Normally stubs are not added on
5604     calls to non-overlay regions.
5605
5606`--local-store=lo:hi'
5607     `ld' usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in the
5608     address range 0 to 256k.  This option may be used to change the
5609     range.  Disable the check entirely with `--local-store=0:0'.
5610
5611`--stack-analysis'
5612     SPU local store space is limited.  Over-allocation of stack space
5613     unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
5614     under-allocation results in runtime failures.  If given this
5615     option, `ld' will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
5616     `ld' does this by examining symbols in code sections to determine
5617     the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues for
5618     stack adjusting instructions.  A call-graph is created by looking
5619     for relocations on branch instructions.  The graph is then searched
5620     for the maximum stack usage path.  Note that this analysis does not
5621     find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle
5622     recursion and other cycles in the call graph.  Stack usage may be
5623     under-estimated if your code makes such calls.  Also, stack usage
5624     for dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected.  If a
5625     link map is requested, detailed information about each function's
5626     stack usage and calls will be given.
5627
5628`--emit-stack-syms'
5629     This option, if given along with `--stack-analysis' will result in
5630     `ld' emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.  These take
5631     the form `__stack_<function_name>' for global functions, and
5632     `__stack_<number>_<function_name>' for static functions.
5633     `<number>' is the section id in hex.  The value of such symbols is
5634     the stack requirement for the corresponding function.  The symbol
5635     size will be zero, type `STT_NOTYPE', binding `STB_LOCAL', and
5636     section `SHN_ABS'.
5637
5638
5639File: ld.info,  Node: TI COFF,  Next: WIN32,  Prev: SPU ELF,  Up: Machine Dependent
5640
56414.13 `ld''s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
5642================================================
5643
5644The `--format' switch allows selection of one of the various TI COFF
5645versions.  The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are also
5646supported.  The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order format;
5647`ld' will read any version or byte order, but the output header format
5648depends on the default specified by the specific target.
5649
5650
5651File: ld.info,  Node: WIN32,  Next: Xtensa,  Prev: TI COFF,  Up: Machine Dependent
5652
56534.14 `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5654==================================
5655
5656This section describes some of the win32 specific `ld' issues.  See
5657*note Command Line Options: Options. for detailed description of the
5658command line options mentioned here.
5659
5660_import libraries_
5661     The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
5662     libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's.  They
5663     are regular static archives and are handled as any other static
5664     archive.  The cygwin and mingw ports of `ld' have specific support
5665     for creating such libraries provided with the `--out-implib'
5666     command line option.
5667
5668_exporting DLL symbols_
5669     The cygwin/mingw `ld' has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
5670
5671    _using auto-export functionality_
5672          By default `ld' exports symbols with the auto-export
5673          functionality, which is controlled by the following command
5674          line options:
5675
5676             * -export-all-symbols   [This is the default]
5677
5678             * -exclude-symbols
5679
5680             * -exclude-libs
5681
5682             * -exclude-modules-for-implib
5683
5684             * -version-script
5685
5686          When auto-export is in operation, `ld' will export all the
5687          non-local (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with
5688          the exception of a few symbols known to belong to the
5689          system's runtime and libraries.  As it will often not be
5690          desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
5691          private functions that are not part of any public interface,
5692          the command-line options listed above may be used to filter
5693          symbols out from the list for exporting.  The `--output-def'
5694          option can be used in order to see the final list of exported
5695          symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
5696
5697          If `--export-all-symbols' is not given explicitly on the
5698          command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be
5699          _disabled_ if either of the following are true:
5700
5701             * A DEF file is used.
5702
5703             * Any symbol in any object file was marked with the
5704               __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
5705
5706    _using a DEF file_
5707          Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file.  A DEF
5708          file is an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which
5709          should be exported when a dll is created.  Usually it is
5710          named `<dll name>.def' and is added as any other object file
5711          to the linker's command line.  The file's name must end in
5712          `.def' or `.DEF'.
5713
5714               gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
5715
5716          Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior,
5717          unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also used.
5718
5719          Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called
5720          `xyz.dll':
5721
5722               LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
5723
5724               EXPORTS
5725               foo
5726               bar
5727               _bar = bar
5728               another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
5729               var1 DATA
5730               doo = foo == foo2
5731               eoo DATA == var1
5732
5733          This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address
5734          and seven symbols in the export table. The third exported
5735          symbol `_bar' is an alias for the second. The fourth symbol,
5736          `another_foo' is resolved by "forwarding" to another module
5737          and treating it as an alias for `afoo' exported from the DLL
5738          `abc.dll'. The final symbol `var1' is declared to be a data
5739          object. The `doo' symbol in export library is an alias of
5740          `foo', which gets the string name in export table `foo2'. The
5741          `eoo' symbol is an data export symbol, which gets in export
5742          table the name `var1'.
5743
5744          The optional `LIBRARY <name>' command indicates the _internal_
5745          name of the output DLL. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
5746          the default library suffix, `.DLL' is appended.
5747
5748          When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather
5749          than a library, the `NAME <name>' command should be used
5750          instead of `LIBRARY'. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
5751          the default executable suffix, `.EXE' is appended.
5752
5753          With either `LIBRARY <name>' or `NAME <name>' the optional
5754          specification `BASE = <number>' may be used to specify a
5755          non-default base address for the image.
5756
5757          If neither `LIBRARY <name>' nor  `NAME <name>' is specified,
5758          or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the
5759          same as the filename specified on the command line.
5760
5761          The complete specification of an export symbol is:
5762
5763               EXPORTS
5764                 ( (  ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
5765                    | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
5766                 [ @ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
5767
5768          Declares `<name1>' as an exported symbol from the DLL, or
5769          declares `<name1>' as an exported alias for `<name2>'; or
5770          declares `<name1>' as a "forward" alias for the symbol
5771          `<external-name>' in the DLL `<module-name>'.  Optionally,
5772          the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
5773          `<integer>' alias. The optional `<name3>' is the to be used
5774          string in import/export table for the symbol.
5775
5776          The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
5777
5778          `NONAME': Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export
5779          table.  It will still be exported by its ordinal alias
5780          (either the value specified by the .def specification or,
5781          otherwise, the value assigned by the linker). The symbol
5782          name, however, does remain visible in the import library (if
5783          any), unless `PRIVATE' is also specified.
5784
5785          `DATA': The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a
5786          function.  The import lib will export only an indirect
5787          reference to `foo' as the symbol `_imp__foo' (ie, `foo' must
5788          be resolved as `*_imp__foo').
5789
5790          `CONSTANT': Like `DATA', but put the undecorated `foo' as
5791          well as `_imp__foo' into the import library. Both refer to the
5792          read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not
5793          to the variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user
5794          code fails to add the `dllimport' attribute and also fails to
5795          explicitly add the extra indirection that the use of the
5796          attribute enforces, the application will behave unexpectedly.
5797
5798          `PRIVATE': Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do
5799          not put it into the static import library used to resolve
5800          imports at link time. The symbol can still be imported using
5801          the `LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress' API at runtime or by by
5802          using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to the DLL
5803          without an import library.
5804
5805          See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full
5806          specification of other DEF file statements
5807
5808          While linking a shared dll, `ld' is able to create a DEF file
5809          with the `--output-def <file>' command line option.
5810
5811    _Using decorations_
5812          Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the
5813          source code itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol
5814          to be exported is declared as:
5815
5816               __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
5817               __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
5818
5819          All such symbols will be exported from the DLL.  If, however,
5820          any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated
5821          in this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is
5822          disabled, unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also
5823          used.
5824
5825          Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must
5826          _not_ decorate them with dllexport.  Instead, they should use
5827          dllimport, instead:
5828
5829               __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
5830               __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
5831
5832          This complicates the structure of library header files,
5833          because when included by the library itself the header must
5834          declare the variables and functions as dllexport, but when
5835          included by client code the header must declare them as
5836          dllimport.  There are a number of idioms that are typically
5837          used to do this; often client code can omit the __declspec()
5838          declaration completely.  See `--enable-auto-import' and
5839          `automatic data imports' for more information.
5840
5841_automatic data imports_
5842     The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls
5843     only by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which
5844     let the compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal
5845     with this issue.  This increases the effort necessary to port
5846     existing Un*x code to these platforms, especially for large c++
5847     libraries and applications.  The auto-import feature, which was
5848     initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
5849     decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on
5850     POSIX/Un*x platforms. This feature is enabled with the
5851     `--enable-auto-import' command-line option, although it is enabled
5852     by default on cygwin/mingw.  The `--enable-auto-import' option
5853     itself now serves mainly to suppress any warnings that are
5854     ordinarily emitted when linked objects trigger the feature's use.
5855
5856     auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
5857     additional assistance.  Sometimes, you will see this message
5858
5859     "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
5860     documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
5861
5862     The `--enable-auto-import' documentation explains why this error
5863     occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this
5864     difficulty.  One of these methods is the _runtime pseudo-relocs_
5865     feature, described below.
5866
5867     For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or
5868     classes), object files typically contain a base address for the
5869     variable and an offset (_addend_) within the variable-to specify a
5870     particular field or public member, for instance.  Unfortunately,
5871     the runtime loader used in win32 environments is incapable of
5872     fixing these references at runtime without the additional
5873     information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.  The
5874     standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve
5875     these references.
5876
5877     The `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' switch allows these
5878     references to be resolved without error, while leaving the task of
5879     adjusting the references themselves (with their non-zero addends)
5880     to specialized code provided by the runtime environment.  Recent
5881     versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and compilers
5882     provide this runtime support; older versions do not.  However, the
5883     support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the
5884     compiled result will run without error on an older system.
5885
5886     `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is not the default; it must be
5887     explicitly enabled as needed.
5888
5889_direct linking to a dll_
5890     The cygwin/mingw ports of `ld' support the direct linking,
5891     including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
5892     libraries.  This is much faster and uses much less memory than
5893     does the traditional import library method, especially when
5894     linking large libraries or applications.  When `ld' creates an
5895     import lib, each function or variable exported from the dll is
5896     stored in its own bfd, even though a single bfd could contain many
5897     exports.  The overhead involved in storing, loading, and
5898     processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
5899     tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against
5900     particularly large or complex libraries when using import libs.
5901
5902     Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches
5903     other than `-L' and `-l', because `ld' already searches for a
5904     number of names to match each library.  All that is needed from
5905     the developer's perspective is an understanding of this search, in
5906     order to force ld to select the dll instead of an import library.
5907
5908     For instance, when ld is called with the argument `-lxxx' it will
5909     attempt to find, in the first directory of its search path,
5910
5911          libxxx.dll.a
5912          xxx.dll.a
5913          libxxx.a
5914          xxx.lib
5915          cygxxx.dll (*)
5916          libxxx.dll
5917          xxx.dll
5918
5919     before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
5920
5921     (*) Actually, this is not `cygxxx.dll' but in fact is
5922     `<prefix>xxx.dll', where `<prefix>' is set by the `ld' option
5923     `--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>'. In the case of cygwin, the
5924     standard gcc spec file includes `--dll-search-prefix=cyg', so in
5925     effect we actually search for `cygxxx.dll'.
5926
5927     Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may
5928     use other `<prefix>'es, although at present only cygwin makes use
5929     of this feature.  It was originally intended to help avoid name
5930     conflicts among dll's built for the various win32/un*x
5931     environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
5932     could coexist on the same machine.
5933
5934     The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a `bin' directory for
5935     applications and dll's and a `lib' directory for the import
5936     libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
5937
5938          bin/
5939          	cygxxx.dll
5940          lib/
5941          	libxxx.dll.a   (in case of dll's)
5942          	libxxx.a       (in case of static archive)
5943
5944     Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
5945     done two ways:
5946
5947     1. Use the dll directly by adding the `bin' path to the link line
5948          gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
5949
5950     However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their
5951     names (`cygncurses-5.dll') this will often fail, unless one
5952     specifies `-L../bin -lncurses-5' to include the version.  Import
5953     libs are generally not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
5954
5955     2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the `lib'
5956     directory according to the above mentioned search pattern.  This
5957     should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
5958     making the app/dll.
5959
5960          ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
5961
5962     Then you can link without any make environment changes.
5963
5964          gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
5965
5966     This technique also avoids the version number problems, because
5967     the following is perfectly legal
5968
5969          bin/
5970          	cygxxx-5.dll
5971          lib/
5972          	libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
5973
5974     Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
5975     even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
5976     `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is used.
5977
5978     Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might
5979     justifiably wonder why import libraries are used at all.  There
5980     are three reasons:
5981
5982     1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did _not_
5983     work with auto-imported data.
5984
5985     2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within
5986     the import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for
5987     indirection symbols that point to the exports of a dll).  Again,
5988     the import lib for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability,
5989     and it is not possible to do this without an import lib.
5990
5991     3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib.  This
5992     is critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32
5993     API) in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases
5994     of their stdcall-decorated assembly names.
5995
5996     So, import libs are not going away.  But the ability to replace
5997     true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of) a
5998     dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
5999     binutils makes available to the win32 developer.  Given the
6000     massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6001     requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6002     will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
6003
6004_symbol aliasing_
6005
6006    _adding additional names_
6007          Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional
6008          names.  A symbol `foo' will be exported as `foo', but it can
6009          also be exported as `_foo' by using special directives in the
6010          DEF file when creating the dll.  This will affect also the
6011          optional created import library.  Consider the following DEF
6012          file:
6013
6014               LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6015
6016               EXPORTS
6017               foo
6018               _foo = foo
6019
6020          The line `_foo = foo' maps the symbol `foo' to `_foo'.
6021
6022          Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in
6023          the source code using the "weak" attribute:
6024
6025               void foo () { /* Do something.  */; }
6026               void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
6027
6028          See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and
6029          weak symbols.
6030
6031    _renaming symbols_
6032          Sometimes it is useful to rename exports.  For instance, the
6033          cygwin kernel does this regularly.  A symbol `_foo' can be
6034          exported as `foo' but not as `_foo' by using special
6035          directives in the DEF file. (This will also affect the import
6036          library, if it is created).  In the following example:
6037
6038               LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6039
6040               EXPORTS
6041               _foo = foo
6042
6043          The line `_foo = foo' maps the exported symbol `foo' to
6044          `_foo'.
6045
6046     Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
6047     unless the `--export-all-symbols' command line option is used.
6048     If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
6049     _all_ desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols that
6050     are not being renamed, and do _not_ use the `--export-all-symbols'
6051     option.  If you list only the renamed symbols in the DEF file, and
6052     use `--export-all-symbols' to handle the other symbols, then the
6053     both the new names _and_ the original names for the renamed
6054     symbols will be exported.  In effect, you'd be aliasing those
6055     symbols, not renaming them, which is probably not what you wanted.
6056
6057_weak externals_
6058     The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols
6059     called weak externals.  When a weak symbol is linked and the
6060     symbol is not defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some
6061     other symbol.  There are three variants of weak externals:
6062        * Definition is searched for in objects and libraries,
6063          historically called lazy externals.
6064
6065        * Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in
6066          libraries.  This form is not presently implemented.
6067
6068        * No search; the symbol is an alias.  This form is not presently
6069          implemented.
6070     As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate
6071     symbol are supported.  If the symbol is undefined when linking,
6072     the symbol uses a default value.
6073
6074_aligned common symbols_
6075     As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to
6076     specify the desired alignment for a common symbol.  This
6077     information is conveyed from the assembler or compiler to the
6078     linker by means of GNU-specific commands carried in the object
6079     file's `.drectve' section, which are recognized by `ld' and
6080     respected when laying out the common symbols.  Native tools will
6081     be able to process object files employing this GNU extension, but
6082     will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue
6083     noisy warnings about unknown linker directives.
6084
6085
6086File: ld.info,  Node: Xtensa,  Prev: WIN32,  Up: Machine Dependent
6087
60884.15 `ld' and Xtensa Processors
6089===============================
6090
6091The default `ld' behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6092`SECTIONS' commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6093specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6094keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  For
6095example, with the command:
6096
6097     SECTIONS
6098     {
6099       .text : {
6100         *(.literal .text)
6101       }
6102     }
6103
6104`ld' may interleave some of the `.literal' and `.text' sections from
6105different object files to ensure that the literal pools are within the
6106range of PC-relative load offsets.  A valid interleaving might place
6107the `.literal' sections from an initial group of files followed by the
6108`.text' sections of that group of files.  Then, the `.literal' sections
6109from the rest of the files and the `.text' sections from the rest of
6110the files would follow.
6111
6112   Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of `ld' and
6113provides two important link-time optimizations.  The first optimization
6114is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size.  A redundant
6115literal will be removed and all the `L32R' instructions that use it
6116will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
6117location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
6118the `L32R' instructions.  The second optimization is to remove
6119unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated "longcall" sequences of
6120`L32R'/`CALLXN' when the target functions are within range of direct
6121`CALLN' instructions.
6122
6123   For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be
6124optimized to a direct call, the linker will change the `CALLXN'
6125instruction to a `CALLN' instruction, remove the `L32R' instruction,
6126and remove the literal referenced by the `L32R' instruction if it is
6127not used for anything else.  Removing the `L32R' instruction always
6128reduces code size but can potentially hurt performance by changing the
6129alignment of subsequent branch targets.  By default, the linker will
6130always preserve alignments, either by switching some instructions
6131between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent density instructions or by
6132inserting a no-op in place of the `L32R' instruction that was removed.
6133If code size is more important than performance, the `--size-opt'
6134option can be used to prevent the linker from widening density
6135instructions or inserting no-ops, except in a few cases where no-ops
6136are required for correctness.
6137
6138   The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
6139control the linker:
6140
6141`--size-opt'
6142     When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code
6143     size more than performance.  With this option, the linker will not
6144     insert no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch
6145     target alignment.  There may still be some cases where no-ops are
6146     required to preserve the correctness of the code.
6147
6148
6149File: ld.info,  Node: BFD,  Next: Reporting Bugs,  Prev: Machine Dependent,  Up: Top
6150
61515 BFD
6152*****
6153
6154The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
6155These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
6156object files whatever the object file format.  A different object file
6157format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
6158it to the library.  To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
6159associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
6160object file formats available.  You can use `objdump -i' (*note
6161objdump: (binutils.info)objdump.) to list all the formats available for
6162your configuration.
6163
6164   As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between several
6165conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing BFD design was
6166efficiency: any time used converting between formats is time which
6167would not have been spent had BFD not been involved. This is partly
6168offset by abstraction payback; since BFD simplifies applications and
6169back ends, more time and care may be spent optimizing algorithms for a
6170greater speed.
6171
6172   One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in mind
6173is the potential for information loss.  There are two places where
6174useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
6175conversion and during output. *Note BFD information loss::.
6176
6177* Menu:
6178
6179* BFD outline::                 How it works: an outline of BFD
6180
6181
6182File: ld.info,  Node: BFD outline,  Up: BFD
6183
61845.1 How It Works: An Outline of BFD
6185===================================
6186
6187When an object file is opened, BFD subroutines automatically determine
6188the format of the input object file.  They then build a descriptor in
6189memory with pointers to routines that will be used to access elements of
6190the object file's data structures.
6191
6192   As different information from the object files is required, BFD
6193reads from different sections of the file and processes them.  For
6194example, a very common operation for the linker is processing symbol
6195tables.  Each BFD back end provides a routine for converting between
6196the object file's representation of symbols and an internal canonical
6197format. When the linker asks for the symbol table of an object file, it
6198calls through a memory pointer to the routine from the relevant BFD
6199back end which reads and converts the table into a canonical form.  The
6200linker then operates upon the canonical form. When the link is finished
6201and the linker writes the output file's symbol table, another BFD back
6202end routine is called to take the newly created symbol table and
6203convert it into the chosen output format.
6204
6205* Menu:
6206
6207* BFD information loss::	Information Loss
6208* Canonical format::		The BFD	canonical object-file format
6209
6210
6211File: ld.info,  Node: BFD information loss,  Next: Canonical format,  Up: BFD outline
6212
62135.1.1 Information Loss
6214----------------------
6215
6216_Information can be lost during output._ The output formats supported
6217by BFD do not provide identical facilities, and information which can
6218be described in one form has nowhere to go in another format. One
6219example of this is alignment information in `b.out'. There is nowhere
6220in an `a.out' format file to store alignment information on the
6221contained data, so when a file is linked from `b.out' and an `a.out'
6222image is produced, alignment information will not propagate to the
6223output file. (The linker will still use the alignment information
6224internally, so the link is performed correctly).
6225
6226   Another example is COFF section names. COFF files may contain an
6227unlimited number of sections, each one with a textual section name. If
6228the target of the link is a format which does not have many sections
6229(e.g., `a.out') or has sections without names (e.g., the Oasys format),
6230the link cannot be done simply. You can circumvent this problem by
6231describing the desired input-to-output section mapping with the linker
6232command language.
6233
6234   _Information can be lost during canonicalization._ The BFD internal
6235canonical form of the external formats is not exhaustive; there are
6236structures in input formats for which there is no direct representation
6237internally.  This means that the BFD back ends cannot maintain all
6238possible data richness through the transformation between external to
6239internal and back to external formats.
6240
6241   This limitation is only a problem when an application reads one
6242format and writes another.  Each BFD back end is responsible for
6243maintaining as much data as possible, and the internal BFD canonical
6244form has structures which are opaque to the BFD core, and exported only
6245to the back ends. When a file is read in one format, the canonical form
6246is generated for BFD and the application. At the same time, the back
6247end saves away any information which may otherwise be lost. If the data
6248is then written back in the same format, the back end routine will be
6249able to use the canonical form provided by the BFD core as well as the
6250information it prepared earlier.  Since there is a great deal of
6251commonality between back ends, there is no information lost when
6252linking or copying big endian COFF to little endian COFF, or `a.out' to
6253`b.out'.  When a mixture of formats is linked, the information is only
6254lost from the files whose format differs from the destination.
6255
6256
6257File: ld.info,  Node: Canonical format,  Prev: BFD information loss,  Up: BFD outline
6258
62595.1.2 The BFD canonical object-file format
6260------------------------------------------
6261
6262The greatest potential for loss of information occurs when there is the
6263least overlap between the information provided by the source format,
6264that stored by the canonical format, and that needed by the destination
6265format. A brief description of the canonical form may help you
6266understand which kinds of data you can count on preserving across
6267conversions.  
6268
6269_files_
6270     Information stored on a per-file basis includes target machine
6271     architecture, particular implementation format type, a demand
6272     pageable bit, and a write protected bit.  Information like Unix
6273     magic numbers is not stored here--only the magic numbers' meaning,
6274     so a `ZMAGIC' file would have both the demand pageable bit and the
6275     write protected text bit set.  The byte order of the target is
6276     stored on a per-file basis, so that big- and little-endian object
6277     files may be used with one another.
6278
6279_sections_
6280     Each section in the input file contains the name of the section,
6281     the section's original address in the object file, size and
6282     alignment information, various flags, and pointers into other BFD
6283     data structures.
6284
6285_symbols_
6286     Each symbol contains a pointer to the information for the object
6287     file which originally defined it, its name, its value, and various
6288     flag bits.  When a BFD back end reads in a symbol table, it
6289     relocates all symbols to make them relative to the base of the
6290     section where they were defined.  Doing this ensures that each
6291     symbol points to its containing section.  Each symbol also has a
6292     varying amount of hidden private data for the BFD back end.  Since
6293     the symbol points to the original file, the private data format
6294     for that symbol is accessible.  `ld' can operate on a collection
6295     of symbols of wildly different formats without problems.
6296
6297     Normal global and simple local symbols are maintained on output,
6298     so an output file (no matter its format) will retain symbols
6299     pointing to functions and to global, static, and common variables.
6300     Some symbol information is not worth retaining; in `a.out', type
6301     information is stored in the symbol table as long symbol names.
6302     This information would be useless to most COFF debuggers; the
6303     linker has command line switches to allow users to throw it away.
6304
6305     There is one word of type information within the symbol, so if the
6306     format supports symbol type information within symbols (for
6307     example, COFF, IEEE, Oasys) and the type is simple enough to fit
6308     within one word (nearly everything but aggregates), the
6309     information will be preserved.
6310
6311_relocation level_
6312     Each canonical BFD relocation record contains a pointer to the
6313     symbol to relocate to, the offset of the data to relocate, the
6314     section the data is in, and a pointer to a relocation type
6315     descriptor. Relocation is performed by passing messages through
6316     the relocation type descriptor and the symbol pointer. Therefore,
6317     relocations can be performed on output data using a relocation
6318     method that is only available in one of the input formats. For
6319     instance, Oasys provides a byte relocation format.  A relocation
6320     record requesting this relocation type would point indirectly to a
6321     routine to perform this, so the relocation may be performed on a
6322     byte being written to a 68k COFF file, even though 68k COFF has no
6323     such relocation type.
6324
6325_line numbers_
6326     Object formats can contain, for debugging purposes, some form of
6327     mapping between symbols, source line numbers, and addresses in the
6328     output file.  These addresses have to be relocated along with the
6329     symbol information.  Each symbol with an associated list of line
6330     number records points to the first record of the list.  The head
6331     of a line number list consists of a pointer to the symbol, which
6332     allows finding out the address of the function whose line number
6333     is being described. The rest of the list is made up of pairs:
6334     offsets into the section and line numbers. Any format which can
6335     simply derive this information can pass it successfully between
6336     formats (COFF, IEEE and Oasys).
6337
6338
6339File: ld.info,  Node: Reporting Bugs,  Next: MRI,  Prev: BFD,  Up: Top
6340
63416 Reporting Bugs
6342****************
6343
6344Your bug reports play an essential role in making `ld' reliable.
6345
6346   Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
6347or it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report
6348is to help the entire community by making the next version of `ld' work
6349better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of `ld'.
6350
6351   In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
6352information that enables us to fix the bug.
6353
6354* Menu:
6355
6356* Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
6357* Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
6358
6359
6360File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Criteria,  Next: Bug Reporting,  Up: Reporting Bugs
6361
63626.1 Have You Found a Bug?
6363=========================
6364
6365If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
6366guidelines:
6367
6368   * If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is
6369     a `ld' bug.  Reliable linkers never crash.
6370
6371   * If `ld' produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
6372
6373   * If `ld' does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
6374     may be a bug.  In the general case, the linker can not verify that
6375     object files are correct.
6376
6377   * If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
6378     improvement of `ld' are welcome in any case.
6379
6380
6381File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Reporting,  Prev: Bug Criteria,  Up: Reporting Bugs
6382
63836.2 How to Report Bugs
6384======================
6385
6386A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
6387If you obtained `ld' from a support organization, we recommend you
6388contact that organization first.
6389
6390   You can find contact information for many support companies and
6391individuals in the file `etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution.
6392
6393   Otherwise, send bug reports for `ld' to
6394`https://support.codesourcery.com/GNUToolchain/'.
6395
6396   The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
6397*report all the facts*.  If you are not sure whether to state a fact or
6398leave it out, state it!
6399
6400   Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
6401problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
6402assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.
6403Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug is
6404a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where
6405that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the
6406contents of that location would fool the linker into doing the right
6407thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a specific, complete
6408example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
6409
6410   Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
6411the bug if it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports
6412on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
6413
6414   Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a
6415bell?"  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
6416respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.  You
6417might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
6418
6419   To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
6420
6421   * The version of `ld'.  `ld' announces it if you start it with the
6422     `--version' argument.
6423
6424     Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
6425     looking for the bug in the current version of `ld'.
6426
6427   * Any patches you may have applied to the `ld' source, including any
6428     patches made to the `BFD' library.
6429
6430   * The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
6431     and version number.
6432
6433   * What compiler (and its version) was used to compile `ld'--e.g.
6434     "`gcc-2.7'".
6435
6436   * The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
6437     observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something
6438     important, list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output
6439     from make) is sufficient.
6440
6441     If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
6442     wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.
6443
6444   * A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce
6445     the bug.  It is generally most helpful to send the actual object
6446     files provided that they are reasonably small.  Say no more than
6447     10K.  For bigger files you can either make them available by FTP
6448     or HTTP or else state that you are willing to send the object
6449     file(s) to whomever requests them.  (Note - your email will be
6450     going to a mailing list, so we do not want to clog it up with
6451     large attachments).  But small attachments are best.
6452
6453     If the source files were assembled using `gas' or compiled using
6454     `gcc', then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
6455     object files.  In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
6456     `gas' or `gcc' was used to produce the object files.  Also say how
6457     `gas' or `gcc' were configured.
6458
6459   * A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
6460     incorrect.  For example, "It gets a fatal signal."
6461
6462     Of course, if the bug is that `ld' gets a fatal signal, then we
6463     will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we
6464     might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well
6465     not give us a chance to make a mistake.
6466
6467     Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
6468     still say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on,
6469     such as, your copy of `ld' is out of sync, or you have encountered
6470     a bug in the C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your
6471     copy might crash and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a
6472     crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug
6473     was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to expect a
6474     crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
6475     observations.
6476
6477   * If you wish to suggest changes to the `ld' source, send us context
6478     diffs, as generated by `diff' with the `-u', `-c', or `-p' option.
6479     Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
6480     discuss something in the `ld' source, refer to it by context, not
6481     by line number.
6482
6483     The line numbers in our development sources will not match those
6484     in your sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful
6485     information to us.
6486
6487   Here are some things that are not necessary:
6488
6489   * A description of the envelope of the bug.
6490
6491     Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
6492     which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
6493     changes will not affect it.
6494
6495     This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
6496     we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
6497     debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
6498     examples.  We recommend that you save your time for something else.
6499
6500     Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_
6501     of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
6502     output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
6503     less time, and so on.
6504
6505     However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
6506     this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
6507     used.
6508
6509   * A patch for the bug.
6510
6511     A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not
6512     omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
6513     assumption that a patch is all we need.  We might see problems
6514     with your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we
6515     might not understand it at all.
6516
6517     Sometimes with a program as complicated as `ld' it is very hard to
6518     construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
6519     path through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will
6520     not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify
6521     that the bug is fixed.
6522
6523     And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
6524     your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A
6525     test case will help us to understand.
6526
6527   * A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
6528
6529     Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about
6530     such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
6531
6532
6533File: ld.info,  Node: MRI,  Next: GNU Free Documentation License,  Prev: Reporting Bugs,  Up: Top
6534
6535Appendix A MRI Compatible Script Files
6536**************************************
6537
6538To aid users making the transition to GNU `ld' from the MRI linker,
6539`ld' can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an alternative to the
6540more general-purpose linker scripting language described in *note
6541Scripts::.  MRI compatible linker scripts have a much simpler command
6542set than the scripting language otherwise used with `ld'.  GNU `ld'
6543supports the most commonly used MRI linker commands; these commands are
6544described here.
6545
6546   In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the `a.out' object
6547file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
6548features to make use of them.
6549
6550   You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
6551`-c' command-line option.
6552
6553   Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
6554command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
6555blank lines are also allowed for punctuation).  If a line of an
6556MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, `ld' issues
6557a warning message, but continues processing the script.
6558
6559   Lines beginning with `*' are comments.
6560
6561   You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
6562lower case; for example, `chip' is the same as `CHIP'.  The following
6563list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
6564
6565`ABSOLUTE SECNAME'
6566`ABSOLUTE SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
6567     Normally, `ld' includes in the output file all sections from all
6568     the input files.  However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can
6569     use the `ABSOLUTE' command to restrict the sections that will be
6570     present in your output program.  If the `ABSOLUTE' command is used
6571     at all in a script, then only the sections named explicitly in
6572     `ABSOLUTE' commands will appear in the linker output.  You can
6573     still use other input sections (whatever you select on the command
6574     line, or using `LOAD') to resolve addresses in the output file.
6575
6576`ALIAS OUT-SECNAME, IN-SECNAME'
6577     Use this command to place the data from input section IN-SECNAME
6578     in a section called OUT-SECNAME in the linker output file.
6579
6580     IN-SECNAME may be an integer.
6581
6582`ALIGN SECNAME = EXPRESSION'
6583     Align the section called SECNAME to EXPRESSION.  The EXPRESSION
6584     should be a power of two.
6585
6586`BASE EXPRESSION'
6587     Use the value of EXPRESSION as the lowest address (other than
6588     absolute addresses) in the output file.
6589
6590`CHIP EXPRESSION'
6591`CHIP EXPRESSION, EXPRESSION'
6592     This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
6593
6594`END'
6595     This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for
6596     compatibility.
6597
6598`FORMAT OUTPUT-FORMAT'
6599     Similar to the `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command in the more general linker
6600     language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
6601
6602       1. S-records, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `S'
6603
6604       2. IEEE, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `IEEE'
6605
6606       3. COFF (the `coff-m68k' variant in BFD), if OUTPUT-FORMAT is
6607          `COFF'
6608
6609`LIST ANYTHING...'
6610     Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
6611     `ld' command-line option `-M'.
6612
6613     The keyword `LIST' may be followed by anything on the same line,
6614     with no change in its effect.
6615
6616`LOAD FILENAME'
6617`LOAD FILENAME, FILENAME, ... FILENAME'
6618     Include one or more object file FILENAME in the link; this has the
6619     same effect as specifying FILENAME directly on the `ld' command
6620     line.
6621
6622`NAME OUTPUT-NAME'
6623     OUTPUT-NAME is the name for the program produced by `ld'; the
6624     MRI-compatible command `NAME' is equivalent to the command-line
6625     option `-o' or the general script language command `OUTPUT'.
6626
6627`ORDER SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
6628`ORDER SECNAME SECNAME SECNAME'
6629     Normally, `ld' orders the sections in its output file in the order
6630     in which they first appear in the input files.  In an
6631     MRI-compatible script, you can override this ordering with the
6632     `ORDER' command.  The sections you list with `ORDER' will appear
6633     first in your output file, in the order specified.
6634
6635`PUBLIC NAME=EXPRESSION'
6636`PUBLIC NAME,EXPRESSION'
6637`PUBLIC NAME EXPRESSION'
6638     Supply a value (EXPRESSION) for external symbol NAME used in the
6639     linker input files.
6640
6641`SECT SECNAME, EXPRESSION'
6642`SECT SECNAME=EXPRESSION'
6643`SECT SECNAME EXPRESSION'
6644     You can use any of these three forms of the `SECT' command to
6645     specify the start address (EXPRESSION) for section SECNAME.  If
6646     you have more than one `SECT' statement for the same SECNAME, only
6647     the _first_ sets the start address.
6648
6649
6650File: ld.info,  Node: GNU Free Documentation License,  Next: LD Index,  Prev: MRI,  Up: Top
6651
6652Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
6653*****************************************
6654
6655                     Version 1.3, 3 November 2008
6656
6657     Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6658     `http://fsf.org/'
6659
6660     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
6661     of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
6662
6663  0. PREAMBLE
6664
6665     The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
6666     functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
6667     assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
6668     with or without modifying it, either commercially or
6669     noncommercially.  Secondarily, this License preserves for the
6670     author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
6671     being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
6672
6673     This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
6674     works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
6675     It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
6676     license designed for free software.
6677
6678     We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
6679     free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
6680     free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
6681     that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
6682     software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
6683     of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.
6684     We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
6685     instruction or reference.
6686
6687  1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
6688
6689     This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium,
6690     that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it
6691     can be distributed under the terms of this License.  Such a notice
6692     grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration,
6693     to use that work under the conditions stated herein.  The
6694     "Document", below, refers to any such manual or work.  Any member
6695     of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "you".  You
6696     accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a
6697     way requiring permission under copyright law.
6698
6699     A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
6700     Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
6701     modifications and/or translated into another language.
6702
6703     A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
6704     of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
6705     publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
6706     subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
6707     fall directly within that overall subject.  (Thus, if the Document
6708     is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not
6709     explain any mathematics.)  The relationship could be a matter of
6710     historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or
6711     of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
6712     regarding them.
6713
6714     The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
6715     titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in
6716     the notice that says that the Document is released under this
6717     License.  If a section does not fit the above definition of
6718     Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant.
6719     The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections.  If the Document
6720     does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.
6721
6722     The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
6723     listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
6724     that says that the Document is released under this License.  A
6725     Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may
6726     be at most 25 words.
6727
6728     A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
6729     represented in a format whose specification is available to the
6730     general public, that is suitable for revising the document
6731     straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
6732     composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
6733     widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
6734     text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
6735     formats suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an
6736     otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of
6737     markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent
6738     modification by readers is not Transparent.  An image format is
6739     not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text.  A
6740     copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque".
6741
6742     Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
6743     ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
6744     SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
6745     standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for
6746     human modification.  Examples of transparent image formats include
6747     PNG, XCF and JPG.  Opaque formats include proprietary formats that
6748     can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or
6749     XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally
6750     available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF
6751     produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
6752
6753     The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
6754     plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
6755     material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
6756     works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
6757     Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
6758     work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
6759
6760     The "publisher" means any person or entity that distributes copies
6761     of the Document to the public.
6762
6763     A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document
6764     whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses
6765     following text that translates XYZ in another language.  (Here XYZ
6766     stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as
6767     "Acknowledgements", "Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".)
6768     To "Preserve the Title" of such a section when you modify the
6769     Document means that it remains a section "Entitled XYZ" according
6770     to this definition.
6771
6772     The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
6773     which states that this License applies to the Document.  These
6774     Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in
6775     this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
6776     implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and
6777     has no effect on the meaning of this License.
6778
6779  2. VERBATIM COPYING
6780
6781     You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
6782     commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
6783     copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
6784     applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
6785     add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
6786     may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
6787     or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
6788     you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
6789     distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow
6790     the conditions in section 3.
6791
6792     You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
6793     and you may publicly display copies.
6794
6795  3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
6796
6797     If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly
6798     have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and
6799     the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
6800     enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all
6801     these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
6802     Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
6803     and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
6804     front cover must present the full title with all words of the
6805     title equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material
6806     on the covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the
6807     covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and
6808     satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in
6809     other respects.
6810
6811     If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
6812     legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
6813     reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
6814     adjacent pages.
6815
6816     If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
6817     numbering more than 100, you must either include a
6818     machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or
6819     state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from
6820     which the general network-using public has access to download
6821     using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent
6822     copy of the Document, free of added material.  If you use the
6823     latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you
6824     begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that
6825     this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
6826     location until at least one year after the last time you
6827     distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or
6828     retailers) of that edition to the public.
6829
6830     It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
6831     the Document well before redistributing any large number of
6832     copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated
6833     version of the Document.
6834
6835  4. MODIFICATIONS
6836
6837     You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
6838     under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
6839     release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with
6840     the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus
6841     licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to
6842     whoever possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these
6843     things in the Modified Version:
6844
6845       A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
6846          distinct from that of the Document, and from those of
6847          previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed
6848          in the History section of the Document).  You may use the
6849          same title as a previous version if the original publisher of
6850          that version gives permission.
6851
6852       B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
6853          entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in
6854          the Modified Version, together with at least five of the
6855          principal authors of the Document (all of its principal
6856          authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you
6857          from this requirement.
6858
6859       C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
6860          Modified Version, as the publisher.
6861
6862       D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
6863
6864       E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
6865          adjacent to the other copyright notices.
6866
6867       F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
6868          notice giving the public permission to use the Modified
6869          Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in
6870          the Addendum below.
6871
6872       G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
6873          Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
6874          license notice.
6875
6876       H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
6877
6878       I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title,
6879          and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new
6880          authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on
6881          the Title Page.  If there is no section Entitled "History" in
6882          the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors,
6883          and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page,
6884          then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in
6885          the previous sentence.
6886
6887       J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document
6888          for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
6889          likewise the network locations given in the Document for
6890          previous versions it was based on.  These may be placed in
6891          the "History" section.  You may omit a network location for a
6892          work that was published at least four years before the
6893          Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version
6894          it refers to gives permission.
6895
6896       K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
6897          Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the
6898          section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor
6899          acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
6900
6901       L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
6902          unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers
6903          or the equivalent are not considered part of the section
6904          titles.
6905
6906       M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements".  Such a section
6907          may not be included in the Modified Version.
6908
6909       N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
6910          "Endorsements" or to conflict in title with any Invariant
6911          Section.
6912
6913       O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
6914
6915     If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
6916     appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
6917     material copied from the Document, you may at your option
6918     designate some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this,
6919     add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified
6920     Version's license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any
6921     other section titles.
6922
6923     You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
6924     nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
6925     parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text
6926     has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
6927     definition of a standard.
6928
6929     You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
6930     and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end
6931     of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one
6932     passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be
6933     added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the
6934     Document already includes a cover text for the same cover,
6935     previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity
6936     you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may
6937     replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
6938     publisher that added the old one.
6939
6940     The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
6941     License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
6942     assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
6943
6944  5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
6945
6946     You may combine the Document with other documents released under
6947     this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
6948     modified versions, provided that you include in the combination
6949     all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
6950     unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
6951     combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all
6952     their Warranty Disclaimers.
6953
6954     The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
6955     multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
6956     copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
6957     but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
6958     by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
6959     original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
6960     unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
6961     the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
6962     combined work.
6963
6964     In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
6965     "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
6966     Entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled
6967     "Acknowledgements", and any sections Entitled "Dedications".  You
6968     must delete all sections Entitled "Endorsements."
6969
6970  6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
6971
6972     You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
6973     documents released under this License, and replace the individual
6974     copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
6975     that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
6976     rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
6977     documents in all other respects.
6978
6979     You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
6980     distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
6981     a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow
6982     this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of
6983     that document.
6984
6985  7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
6986
6987     A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
6988     separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of
6989     a storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the
6990     copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
6991     legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual
6992     works permit.  When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
6993     License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which
6994     are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
6995
6996     If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
6997     copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
6998     of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed
6999     on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
7000     electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
7001     form.  Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket
7002     the whole aggregate.
7003
7004  8. TRANSLATION
7005
7006     Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
7007     distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
7008     4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
7009     permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
7010     translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
7011     original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
7012     translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
7013     Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also
7014     include the original English version of this License and the
7015     original versions of those notices and disclaimers.  In case of a
7016     disagreement between the translation and the original version of
7017     this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
7018     prevail.
7019
7020     If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
7021     "Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to
7022     Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
7023     actual title.
7024
7025  9. TERMINATION
7026
7027     You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
7028     except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
7029     otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void,
7030     and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
7031
7032     However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
7033     license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
7034     provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly
7035     and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
7036     copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some
7037     reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
7038
7039     Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
7040     reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
7041     violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
7042     received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from
7043     that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days
7044     after your receipt of the notice.
7045
7046     Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate
7047     the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from
7048     you under this License.  If your rights have been terminated and
7049     not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of
7050     the same material does not give you any rights to use it.
7051
7052 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
7053
7054     The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
7055     the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
7056     versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
7057     differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
7058     `http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/'.
7059
7060     Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
7061     number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
7062     version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
7063     have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
7064     that specified version or of any later version that has been
7065     published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If
7066     the Document does not specify a version number of this License,
7067     you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the
7068     Free Software Foundation.  If the Document specifies that a proxy
7069     can decide which future versions of this License can be used, that
7070     proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
7071     authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
7072
7073 11. RELICENSING
7074
7075     "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site" (or "MMC Site") means any
7076     World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
7077     provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works.  A
7078     public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server.
7079     A "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration" (or "MMC") contained in the
7080     site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC
7081     site.
7082
7083     "CC-BY-SA" means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
7084     license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
7085     corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
7086     California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
7087     published by that same organization.
7088
7089     "Incorporate" means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
7090     in part, as part of another Document.
7091
7092     An MMC is "eligible for relicensing" if it is licensed under this
7093     License, and if all works that were first published under this
7094     License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently
7095     incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover
7096     texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior
7097     to November 1, 2008.
7098
7099     The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the
7100     site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1,
7101     2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
7102
7103
7104ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
7105====================================================
7106
7107To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
7108the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
7109notices just after the title page:
7110
7111       Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
7112       Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
7113       under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
7114       or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
7115       with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
7116       Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
7117       Free Documentation License''.
7118
7119   If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
7120Texts, replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
7121
7122         with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with
7123         the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts
7124         being LIST.
7125
7126   If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
7127combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
7128situation.
7129
7130   If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
7131recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
7132free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to
7133permit their use in free software.
7134
7135
7136File: ld.info,  Node: LD Index,  Prev: GNU Free Documentation License,  Up: Top
7137
7138LD Index
7139********
7140
7141[index]
7142* Menu:
7143
7144* ":                                     Symbols.            (line    6)
7145* -(:                                    Options.            (line  696)
7146* --accept-unknown-input-arch:           Options.            (line  714)
7147* --add-needed:                          Options.            (line  738)
7148* --add-stdcall-alias:                   Options.            (line 1593)
7149* --allow-multiple-definition:           Options.            (line  989)
7150* --allow-shlib-undefined:               Options.            (line  995)
7151* --architecture=ARCH:                   Options.            (line  123)
7152* --as-needed:                           Options.            (line  724)
7153* --audit AUDITLIB:                      Options.            (line  112)
7154* --auxiliary=NAME:                      Options.            (line  255)
7155* --bank-window:                         Options.            (line 2025)
7156* --base-file:                           Options.            (line 1598)
7157* --be8:                                 ARM.                (line   28)
7158* --bss-plt:                             PowerPC ELF32.      (line   16)
7159* --build-id:                            Options.            (line 1545)
7160* --build-id=STYLE:                      Options.            (line 1545)
7161* --check-sections:                      Options.            (line  817)
7162* --copy-dt-needed-entries:              Options.            (line  829)
7163* --cref:                                Options.            (line  849)
7164* --default-imported-symver:             Options.            (line 1032)
7165* --default-script=SCRIPT:               Options.            (line  541)
7166* --default-symver:                      Options.            (line 1028)
7167* --defsym=SYMBOL=EXP:                   Options.            (line  877)
7168* --demangle[=STYLE]:                    Options.            (line  890)
7169* --depaudit AUDITLIB:                   Options.            (line  177)
7170* --disable-auto-image-base:             Options.            (line 1777)
7171* --disable-auto-import:                 Options.            (line 1912)
7172* --disable-long-section-names:          Options.            (line 1608)
7173* --disable-new-dtags:                   Options.            (line 1508)
7174* --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:        Options.            (line 1925)
7175* --disable-stdcall-fixup:               Options.            (line 1630)
7176* --discard-all:                         Options.            (line  587)
7177* --discard-locals:                      Options.            (line  591)
7178* --dll:                                 Options.            (line 1603)
7179* --dll-search-prefix:                   Options.            (line 1783)
7180* --dotsyms:                             PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
7181* --dsbt-index:                          Options.            (line 2002)
7182* --dsbt-size:                           Options.            (line 1997)
7183* --dynamic-linker=FILE:                 Options.            (line  903)
7184* --dynamic-list-cpp-new:                Options.            (line  809)
7185* --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo:           Options.            (line  813)
7186* --dynamic-list-data:                   Options.            (line  806)
7187* --dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE:      Options.            (line  793)
7188* --dynamicbase:                         Options.            (line 1961)
7189* --eh-frame-hdr:                        Options.            (line 1499)
7190* --emit-relocs:                         Options.            (line  476)
7191* --emit-stack-syms:                     SPU ELF.            (line   46)
7192* --emit-stub-syms <1>:                  SPU ELF.            (line   15)
7193* --emit-stub-syms <2>:                  PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
7194* --emit-stub-syms:                      PowerPC ELF32.      (line   47)
7195* --enable-auto-image-base:              Options.            (line 1769)
7196* --enable-auto-import:                  Options.            (line 1792)
7197* --enable-extra-pe-debug:               Options.            (line 1930)
7198* --enable-long-section-names:           Options.            (line 1608)
7199* --enable-new-dtags:                    Options.            (line 1508)
7200* --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:         Options.            (line 1917)
7201* --enable-stdcall-fixup:                Options.            (line 1630)
7202* --entry=ENTRY:                         Options.            (line  187)
7203* --error-poison-system-directories:     Options.            (line 1573)
7204* --error-unresolved-symbols:            Options.            (line 1452)
7205* --exclude-all-symbols:                 Options.            (line 1684)
7206* --exclude-libs:                        Options.            (line  197)
7207* --exclude-modules-for-implib:          Options.            (line  208)
7208* --exclude-symbols:                     Options.            (line 1678)
7209* --export-all-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1654)
7210* --export-dynamic:                      Options.            (line  221)
7211* --extra-overlay-stubs:                 SPU ELF.            (line   19)
7212* --fatal-warnings:                      Options.            (line  910)
7213* --file-alignment:                      Options.            (line 1688)
7214* --filter=NAME:                         Options.            (line  276)
7215* --fix-arm1176:                         ARM.                (line  112)
7216* --fix-cortex-a8 <1>:                   ARM.                (line  166)
7217* --fix-cortex-a8:                       i960.               (line   39)
7218* --fix-v4bx:                            ARM.                (line   49)
7219* --fix-v4bx-interworking:               ARM.                (line   62)
7220* --force-dynamic:                       Options.            (line  485)
7221* --force-exe-suffix:                    Options.            (line  915)
7222* --forceinteg:                          Options.            (line 1966)
7223* --format=FORMAT:                       Options.            (line  134)
7224* --format=VERSION:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
7225* --gc-sections:                         Options.            (line  925)
7226* --got:                                 Options.            (line 2038)
7227* --got=TYPE:                            M68K.               (line    6)
7228* --gpsize=VALUE:                        Options.            (line  309)
7229* --hash-size=NUMBER:                    Options.            (line 1517)
7230* --hash-style=STYLE:                    Options.            (line 1525)
7231* --heap:                                Options.            (line 1694)
7232* --help:                                Options.            (line  962)
7233* --image-base:                          Options.            (line 1701)
7234* --insn32 <1>:                          MIPS.               (line    6)
7235* --insn32:                              Options.            (line 2050)
7236* --just-symbols=FILE:                   Options.            (line  508)
7237* --kill-at:                             Options.            (line 1710)
7238* --large-address-aware:                 Options.            (line 1715)
7239* --ld-generated-unwind-info:            Options.            (line 1503)
7240* --leading-underscore:                  Options.            (line 1648)
7241* --library-path=DIR:                    Options.            (line  368)
7242* --library=NAMESPEC:                    Options.            (line  335)
7243* --local-store=lo:hi:                   SPU ELF.            (line   24)
7244* --major-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1724)
7245* --major-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1729)
7246* --major-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1733)
7247* --merge-exidx-entries:                 i960.               (line   48)
7248* --minor-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1738)
7249* --minor-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1743)
7250* --minor-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1747)
7251* --mri-script=MRI-CMDFILE:              Options.            (line  158)
7252* --multi-subspace:                      HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
7253* --nmagic:                              Options.            (line  439)
7254* --no-accept-unknown-input-arch:        Options.            (line  714)
7255* --no-add-needed:                       Options.            (line  738)
7256* --no-allow-shlib-undefined:            Options.            (line  995)
7257* --no-as-needed:                        Options.            (line  724)
7258* --no-bind:                             Options.            (line 1980)
7259* --no-check-sections:                   Options.            (line  817)
7260* --no-copy-dt-needed-entries:           Options.            (line  829)
7261* --no-define-common:                    Options.            (line  861)
7262* --no-demangle:                         Options.            (line  890)
7263* --no-dotsyms:                          PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
7264* --no-enum-size-warning:                ARM.                (line  121)
7265* --no-export-dynamic:                   Options.            (line  221)
7266* --no-fatal-warnings:                   Options.            (line  910)
7267* --no-fix-arm1176:                      ARM.                (line  112)
7268* --no-fix-cortex-a8 <1>:                ARM.                (line  166)
7269* --no-fix-cortex-a8:                    i960.               (line   39)
7270* --no-gc-sections:                      Options.            (line  925)
7271* --no-insn32 <1>:                       MIPS.               (line    6)
7272* --no-insn32:                           Options.            (line 2051)
7273* --no-isolation:                        Options.            (line 1973)
7274* --no-keep-memory:                      Options.            (line  974)
7275* --no-leading-underscore:               Options.            (line 1648)
7276* --no-merge-exidx-entries <1>:          i960.               (line   48)
7277* --no-merge-exidx-entries:              Options.            (line 2009)
7278* --no-multi-toc:                        PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
7279* --no-omagic:                           Options.            (line  454)
7280* --no-opd-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
7281* --no-overlays:                         SPU ELF.            (line    9)
7282* --no-poison-system-directories:        Options.            (line 1567)
7283* --no-print-gc-sections:                Options.            (line  947)
7284* --no-seh:                              Options.            (line 1976)
7285* --no-tls-optimize <1>:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
7286* --no-tls-optimize:                     PowerPC ELF32.      (line   51)
7287* --no-toc-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
7288* --no-trampoline:                       Options.            (line 2019)
7289* --no-undefined:                        Options.            (line  981)
7290* --no-undefined-version:                Options.            (line 1023)
7291* --no-warn-mismatch:                    Options.            (line 1036)
7292* --no-warn-search-mismatch:             Options.            (line 1045)
7293* --no-wchar-size-warning:               ARM.                (line  128)
7294* --no-whole-archive:                    Options.            (line 1049)
7295* --noinhibit-exec:                      Options.            (line 1053)
7296* --non-overlapping-opd:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
7297* --nxcompat:                            Options.            (line 1969)
7298* --oformat=OUTPUT-FORMAT:               Options.            (line 1065)
7299* --omagic:                              Options.            (line  445)
7300* --out-implib:                          Options.            (line 1760)
7301* --output-def:                          Options.            (line 1752)
7302* --output=OUTPUT:                       Options.            (line  460)
7303* --pic-executable:                      Options.            (line 1078)
7304* --pic-veneer:                          ARM.                (line  134)
7305* --plugin:                              SPU ELF.            (line    6)
7306* --print-gc-sections:                   Options.            (line  947)
7307* --print-map:                           Options.            (line  402)
7308* --print-output-format:                 Options.            (line  956)
7309* --reduce-memory-overheads:             Options.            (line 1531)
7310* --relax:                               Options.            (line 1094)
7311* --relax on i960:                       i960.               (line   31)
7312* --relax on PowerPC:                    PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
7313* --relax on Xtensa:                     Xtensa.             (line   27)
7314* --relocatable:                         Options.            (line  489)
7315* --retain-symbols-file=FILENAME:        Options.            (line 1120)
7316* --script=SCRIPT:                       Options.            (line  532)
7317* --sdata-got:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   33)
7318* --section-alignment:                   Options.            (line 1935)
7319* --section-start=SECTIONNAME=ORG:       Options.            (line 1276)
7320* --secure-plt:                          PowerPC ELF32.      (line   26)
7321* --sort-common:                         Options.            (line 1218)
7322* --sort-section=alignment:              Options.            (line 1233)
7323* --sort-section=name:                   Options.            (line 1229)
7324* --split-by-file:                       Options.            (line 1237)
7325* --split-by-reloc:                      Options.            (line 1242)
7326* --stack:                               Options.            (line 1941)
7327* --stack-analysis:                      SPU ELF.            (line   29)
7328* --stats:                               Options.            (line 1255)
7329* --strip-all:                           Options.            (line  519)
7330* --strip-debug:                         Options.            (line  523)
7331* --stub-group-size:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
7332* --stub-group-size=N <1>:               HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
7333* --stub-group-size=N:                   ARM.                (line  139)
7334* --subsystem:                           Options.            (line 1948)
7335* --support-old-code:                    ARM.                (line    6)
7336* --sysroot=DIRECTORY:                   Options.            (line 1259)
7337* --target-help:                         Options.            (line  966)
7338* --target1-abs:                         ARM.                (line   32)
7339* --target1-rel:                         ARM.                (line   32)
7340* --target2=TYPE:                        ARM.                (line   37)
7341* --thumb-entry=ENTRY:                   ARM.                (line   17)
7342* --trace:                               Options.            (line  528)
7343* --trace-symbol=SYMBOL:                 Options.            (line  597)
7344* --traditional-format:                  Options.            (line 1264)
7345* --tsaware:                             Options.            (line 1986)
7346* --undefined=SYMBOL:                    Options.            (line  554)
7347* --unique[=SECTION]:                    Options.            (line  572)
7348* --unresolved-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1295)
7349* --use-blx:                             ARM.                (line   74)
7350* --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables:      ARM.                (line   23)
7351* --verbose[=NUMBER]:                    Options.            (line 1324)
7352* --version:                             Options.            (line  581)
7353* --version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE:   Options.            (line 1332)
7354* --vfp11-denorm-fix:                    ARM.                (line   83)
7355* --warn-alternate-em:                   Options.            (line 1444)
7356* --warn-common:                         Options.            (line 1343)
7357* --warn-constructors:                   Options.            (line 1411)
7358* --warn-multiple-gp:                    Options.            (line 1416)
7359* --warn-once:                           Options.            (line 1430)
7360* --warn-section-align:                  Options.            (line 1434)
7361* --warn-shared-textrel:                 Options.            (line 1441)
7362* --warn-unresolved-symbols:             Options.            (line 1447)
7363* --wdmdriver:                           Options.            (line 1983)
7364* --whole-archive:                       Options.            (line 1456)
7365* --wrap=SYMBOL:                         Options.            (line 1470)
7366* -A ARCH:                               Options.            (line  122)
7367* -a KEYWORD:                            Options.            (line  105)
7368* -assert KEYWORD:                       Options.            (line  745)
7369* -b FORMAT:                             Options.            (line  134)
7370* -Bdynamic:                             Options.            (line  748)
7371* -Bgroup:                               Options.            (line  758)
7372* -Bshareable:                           Options.            (line 1211)
7373* -Bstatic:                              Options.            (line  765)
7374* -Bsymbolic:                            Options.            (line  780)
7375* -Bsymbolic-functions:                  Options.            (line  787)
7376* -c MRI-CMDFILE:                        Options.            (line  158)
7377* -call_shared:                          Options.            (line  748)
7378* -d:                                    Options.            (line  168)
7379* -dc:                                   Options.            (line  168)
7380* -dn:                                   Options.            (line  765)
7381* -dp:                                   Options.            (line  168)
7382* -dT SCRIPT:                            Options.            (line  541)
7383* -dy:                                   Options.            (line  748)
7384* -E:                                    Options.            (line  221)
7385* -e ENTRY:                              Options.            (line  187)
7386* -EB:                                   Options.            (line  248)
7387* -EL:                                   Options.            (line  251)
7388* -F NAME:                               Options.            (line  276)
7389* -f NAME:                               Options.            (line  255)
7390* -fini=NAME:                            Options.            (line  300)
7391* -g:                                    Options.            (line  306)
7392* -G VALUE:                              Options.            (line  309)
7393* -h NAME:                               Options.            (line  317)
7394* -i:                                    Options.            (line  326)
7395* -IFILE:                                Options.            (line  903)
7396* -init=NAME:                            Options.            (line  329)
7397* -L DIR:                                Options.            (line  368)
7398* -l NAMESPEC:                           Options.            (line  335)
7399* -M:                                    Options.            (line  402)
7400* -m EMULATION:                          Options.            (line  392)
7401* -Map=MAPFILE:                          Options.            (line  970)
7402* -N:                                    Options.            (line  445)
7403* -n:                                    Options.            (line  439)
7404* -no-relax:                             Options.            (line 1094)
7405* -non_shared:                           Options.            (line  765)
7406* -nostdlib:                             Options.            (line 1059)
7407* -O LEVEL:                              Options.            (line  466)
7408* -o OUTPUT:                             Options.            (line  460)
7409* -P AUDITLIB:                           Options.            (line  177)
7410* -pie:                                  Options.            (line 1078)
7411* -q:                                    Options.            (line  476)
7412* -qmagic:                               Options.            (line 1088)
7413* -Qy:                                   Options.            (line 1091)
7414* -r:                                    Options.            (line  489)
7415* -R FILE:                               Options.            (line  508)
7416* -rpath-link=DIR:                       Options.            (line 1156)
7417* -rpath=DIR:                            Options.            (line 1134)
7418* -S:                                    Options.            (line  523)
7419* -s:                                    Options.            (line  519)
7420* -shared:                               Options.            (line 1211)
7421* -soname=NAME:                          Options.            (line  317)
7422* -static:                               Options.            (line  765)
7423* -t:                                    Options.            (line  528)
7424* -T SCRIPT:                             Options.            (line  532)
7425* -Tbss=ORG:                             Options.            (line 1285)
7426* -Tdata=ORG:                            Options.            (line 1285)
7427* -Ttext-segment=ORG:                    Options.            (line 1291)
7428* -Ttext=ORG:                            Options.            (line 1285)
7429* -u SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  554)
7430* -Ur:                                   Options.            (line  562)
7431* -V:                                    Options.            (line  581)
7432* -v:                                    Options.            (line  581)
7433* -X:                                    Options.            (line  591)
7434* -x:                                    Options.            (line  587)
7435* -Y PATH:                               Options.            (line  606)
7436* -y SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  597)
7437* -z defs:                               Options.            (line  981)
7438* -z KEYWORD:                            Options.            (line  610)
7439* -z muldefs:                            Options.            (line  989)
7440* .:                                     Location Counter.   (line    6)
7441* /DISCARD/:                             Output Section Discarding.
7442                                                             (line   21)
7443* :PHDR:                                 Output Section Phdr.
7444                                                             (line    6)
7445* =FILLEXP:                              Output Section Fill.
7446                                                             (line    6)
7447* >REGION:                               Output Section Region.
7448                                                             (line    6)
7449* [COMMON]:                              Input Section Common.
7450                                                             (line   29)
7451* ABSOLUTE (MRI):                        MRI.                (line   33)
7452* absolute and relocatable symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
7453* absolute expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
7454* ABSOLUTE(EXP):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
7455* ADDR(SECTION):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
7456* address, section:                      Output Section Address.
7457                                                             (line    6)
7458* ALIAS (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   44)
7459* ALIGN (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   50)
7460* align expression:                      Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
7461* align location counter:                Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
7462* ALIGN(ALIGN):                          Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
7463* ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
7464* ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN):                  Forced Output Alignment.
7465                                                             (line    6)
7466* aligned common symbols:                WIN32.              (line  424)
7467* ALIGNOF(SECTION):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   63)
7468* allocating memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
7469* architecture:                          Miscellaneous Commands.
7470                                                             (line   72)
7471* architectures:                         Options.            (line  122)
7472* archive files, from cmd line:          Options.            (line  335)
7473* archive search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   74)
7474* arithmetic:                            Expressions.        (line    6)
7475* arithmetic operators:                  Operators.          (line    6)
7476* ARM interworking support:              ARM.                (line    6)
7477* ARM1176 erratum workaround:            ARM.                (line  112)
7478* AS_NEEDED(FILES):                      File Commands.      (line   54)
7479* ASSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
7480                                                             (line    9)
7481* assertion in linker script:            Miscellaneous Commands.
7482                                                             (line    9)
7483* assignment in scripts:                 Assignments.        (line    6)
7484* AT(LMA):                               Output Section LMA. (line    6)
7485* AT>LMA_REGION:                         Output Section LMA. (line    6)
7486* automatic data imports:                WIN32.              (line  191)
7487* back end:                              BFD.                (line    6)
7488* BASE (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   54)
7489* BE8:                                   ARM.                (line   28)
7490* BFD canonical format:                  Canonical format.   (line   11)
7491* BFD requirements:                      BFD.                (line   16)
7492* big-endian objects:                    Options.            (line  248)
7493* binary input format:                   Options.            (line  134)
7494* BLOCK(EXP):                            Builtin Functions.  (line   76)
7495* bug criteria:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    6)
7496* bug reports:                           Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
7497* bugs in ld:                            Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
7498* BYTE(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
7499                                                             (line    6)
7500* C++ constructors, arranging in link:   Output Section Keywords.
7501                                                             (line   19)
7502* CHIP (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   58)
7503* COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE:                   Environment.        (line   29)
7504* combining symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1343)
7505* command files:                         Scripts.            (line    6)
7506* command line:                          Options.            (line    6)
7507* common allocation:                     Options.            (line  168)
7508* common allocation in linker script:    Miscellaneous Commands.
7509                                                             (line   20)
7510* common symbol placement:               Input Section Common.
7511                                                             (line    6)
7512* COMMONPAGESIZE:                        Symbolic Constants. (line   13)
7513* compatibility, MRI:                    Options.            (line  158)
7514* CONSTANT:                              Symbolic Constants. (line    6)
7515* constants in linker scripts:           Constants.          (line    6)
7516* constraints on output sections:        Output Section Constraint.
7517                                                             (line    6)
7518* CONSTRUCTORS:                          Output Section Keywords.
7519                                                             (line   19)
7520* constructors:                          Options.            (line  562)
7521* constructors, arranging in link:       Output Section Keywords.
7522                                                             (line   19)
7523* Cortex-A8 erratum workaround <1>:      ARM.                (line  166)
7524* Cortex-A8 erratum workaround:          i960.               (line   39)
7525* crash of linker:                       Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
7526* CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS:                 Output Section Keywords.
7527                                                             (line    9)
7528* creating a DEF file:                   WIN32.              (line  158)
7529* cross reference table:                 Options.            (line  849)
7530* cross references:                      Miscellaneous Commands.
7531                                                             (line   56)
7532* current output location:               Location Counter.   (line    6)
7533* data:                                  Output Section Data.
7534                                                             (line    6)
7535* DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE): Builtin Functions.
7536                                                             (line   81)
7537* DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP):                 Builtin Functions.  (line  102)
7538* DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP):   Builtin Functions.  (line  108)
7539* dbx:                                   Options.            (line 1269)
7540* DEF files, creating:                   Options.            (line 1752)
7541* default emulation:                     Environment.        (line   21)
7542* default input format:                  Environment.        (line    9)
7543* DEFINED(SYMBOL):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  119)
7544* deleting local symbols:                Options.            (line  587)
7545* demangling, default:                   Environment.        (line   29)
7546* demangling, from command line:         Options.            (line  890)
7547* direct linking to a dll:               WIN32.              (line  239)
7548* discarding sections:                   Output Section Discarding.
7549                                                             (line    6)
7550* discontinuous memory:                  MEMORY.             (line    6)
7551* DLLs, creating:                        Options.            (line 1654)
7552* DLLs, linking to:                      Options.            (line 1783)
7553* dot:                                   Location Counter.   (line    6)
7554* dot inside sections:                   Location Counter.   (line   36)
7555* dot outside sections:                  Location Counter.   (line   66)
7556* dynamic linker, from command line:     Options.            (line  903)
7557* dynamic symbol table:                  Options.            (line  221)
7558* ELF program headers:                   PHDRS.              (line    6)
7559* emulation:                             Options.            (line  392)
7560* emulation, default:                    Environment.        (line   21)
7561* END (MRI):                             MRI.                (line   62)
7562* endianness:                            Options.            (line  248)
7563* entry point:                           Entry Point.        (line    6)
7564* entry point, from command line:        Options.            (line  187)
7565* entry point, thumb:                    ARM.                (line   17)
7566* ENTRY(SYMBOL):                         Entry Point.        (line    6)
7567* error on valid input:                  Bug Criteria.       (line   12)
7568* example of linker script:              Simple Example.     (line    6)
7569* exporting DLL symbols:                 WIN32.              (line   19)
7570* expression evaluation order:           Evaluation.         (line    6)
7571* expression sections:                   Expression Section. (line    6)
7572* expression, absolute:                  Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
7573* expressions:                           Expressions.        (line    6)
7574* EXTERN:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
7575                                                             (line   13)
7576* fatal signal:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
7577* file name wildcard patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
7578                                                             (line    6)
7579* FILEHDR:                               PHDRS.              (line   62)
7580* filename symbols:                      Output Section Keywords.
7581                                                             (line    9)
7582* fill pattern, entire section:          Output Section Fill.
7583                                                             (line    6)
7584* FILL(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
7585                                                             (line   39)
7586* finalization function:                 Options.            (line  300)
7587* first input file:                      File Commands.      (line   82)
7588* first instruction:                     Entry Point.        (line    6)
7589* FIX_V4BX:                              ARM.                (line   49)
7590* FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING:                 ARM.                (line   62)
7591* FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION:               Miscellaneous Commands.
7592                                                             (line   20)
7593* forcing input section alignment:       Forced Input Alignment.
7594                                                             (line    6)
7595* forcing output section alignment:      Forced Output Alignment.
7596                                                             (line    6)
7597* forcing the creation of dynamic sections: Options.         (line  485)
7598* FORMAT (MRI):                          MRI.                (line   66)
7599* functions in expressions:              Builtin Functions.  (line    6)
7600* garbage collection <1>:                Input Section Keep. (line    6)
7601* garbage collection:                    Options.            (line  925)
7602* generating optimized output:           Options.            (line  466)
7603* GNU linker:                            Overview.           (line    6)
7604* GNUTARGET:                             Environment.        (line    9)
7605* GROUP(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   47)
7606* grouping input files:                  File Commands.      (line   47)
7607* groups of archives:                    Options.            (line  696)
7608* H8/300 support:                        H8/300.             (line    6)
7609* header size:                           Builtin Functions.  (line  182)
7610* heap size:                             Options.            (line 1694)
7611* help:                                  Options.            (line  962)
7612* holes:                                 Location Counter.   (line   12)
7613* holes, filling:                        Output Section Data.
7614                                                             (line   39)
7615* HPPA multiple sub-space stubs:         HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
7616* HPPA stub grouping:                    HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
7617* i960 support:                          i960.               (line    6)
7618* image base:                            Options.            (line 1701)
7619* implicit linker scripts:               Implicit Linker Scripts.
7620                                                             (line    6)
7621* import libraries:                      WIN32.              (line   10)
7622* INCLUDE FILENAME:                      File Commands.      (line    9)
7623* including a linker script:             File Commands.      (line    9)
7624* including an entire archive:           Options.            (line 1456)
7625* incremental link:                      Options.            (line  326)
7626* INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION:             Miscellaneous Commands.
7627                                                             (line   25)
7628* initialization function:               Options.            (line  329)
7629* initialized data in ROM:               Output Section LMA. (line   39)
7630* input file format in linker script:    Format Commands.    (line   35)
7631* input filename symbols:                Output Section Keywords.
7632                                                             (line    9)
7633* input files in linker scripts:         File Commands.      (line   19)
7634* input files, displaying:               Options.            (line  528)
7635* input format:                          Options.            (line  134)
7636* input object files in linker scripts:  File Commands.      (line   19)
7637* input section alignment:               Forced Input Alignment.
7638                                                             (line    6)
7639* input section basics:                  Input Section Basics.
7640                                                             (line    6)
7641* input section wildcards:               Input Section Wildcards.
7642                                                             (line    6)
7643* input sections:                        Input Section.      (line    6)
7644* INPUT(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   19)
7645* INSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
7646                                                             (line   30)
7647* insert user script into default script: Miscellaneous Commands.
7648                                                             (line   30)
7649* integer notation:                      Constants.          (line    6)
7650* integer suffixes:                      Constants.          (line   15)
7651* internal object-file format:           Canonical format.   (line   11)
7652* invalid input:                         Bug Criteria.       (line   14)
7653* K and M integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   15)
7654* KEEP:                                  Input Section Keep. (line    6)
7655* l =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   74)
7656* lazy evaluation:                       Evaluation.         (line    6)
7657* ld bugs, reporting:                    Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
7658* LD_FEATURE(STRING):                    Miscellaneous Commands.
7659                                                             (line   78)
7660* LDEMULATION:                           Environment.        (line   21)
7661* len =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   74)
7662* LENGTH =:                              MEMORY.             (line   74)
7663* LENGTH(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  136)
7664* library search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   74)
7665* link map:                              Options.            (line  402)
7666* link-time runtime library search path: Options.            (line 1156)
7667* linker crash:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
7668* linker script concepts:                Basic Script Concepts.
7669                                                             (line    6)
7670* linker script example:                 Simple Example.     (line    6)
7671* linker script file commands:           File Commands.      (line    6)
7672* linker script format:                  Script Format.      (line    6)
7673* linker script input object files:      File Commands.      (line   19)
7674* linker script simple commands:         Simple Commands.    (line    6)
7675* linker scripts:                        Scripts.            (line    6)
7676* LIST (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   77)
7677* little-endian objects:                 Options.            (line  251)
7678* LOAD (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   84)
7679* load address:                          Output Section LMA. (line    6)
7680* LOADADDR(SECTION):                     Builtin Functions.  (line  139)
7681* loading, preventing:                   Output Section Type.
7682                                                             (line   22)
7683* local symbols, deleting:               Options.            (line  591)
7684* location counter:                      Location Counter.   (line    6)
7685* LONG(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
7686                                                             (line    6)
7687* M and K integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   15)
7688* M68HC11 and 68HC12 support:            M68HC11/68HC12.     (line    6)
7689* machine architecture:                  Miscellaneous Commands.
7690                                                             (line   72)
7691* machine dependencies:                  Machine Dependent.  (line    6)
7692* mapping input sections to output sections: Input Section.  (line    6)
7693* MAX:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  142)
7694* MAXPAGESIZE:                           Symbolic Constants. (line   10)
7695* MEMORY:                                MEMORY.             (line    6)
7696* memory region attributes:              MEMORY.             (line   34)
7697* memory regions:                        MEMORY.             (line    6)
7698* memory regions and sections:           Output Section Region.
7699                                                             (line    6)
7700* memory usage:                          Options.            (line  974)
7701* MIN:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  145)
7702* MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection: MIPS.         (line    6)
7703* Motorola 68K GOT generation:           M68K.               (line    6)
7704* MRI compatibility:                     MRI.                (line    6)
7705* MSP430 extra sections:                 MSP430.             (line   11)
7706* NAME (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   90)
7707* name, section:                         Output Section Name.
7708                                                             (line    6)
7709* names:                                 Symbols.            (line    6)
7710* naming the output file:                Options.            (line  460)
7711* NEXT(EXP):                             Builtin Functions.  (line  149)
7712* NMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  439)
7713* NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING:                  ARM.                (line  121)
7714* NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING:                 ARM.                (line  128)
7715* NOCROSSREFS(SECTIONS):                 Miscellaneous Commands.
7716                                                             (line   56)
7717* NOLOAD:                                Output Section Type.
7718                                                             (line   22)
7719* not enough room for program headers:   Builtin Functions.  (line  187)
7720* o =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   69)
7721* objdump -i:                            BFD.                (line    6)
7722* object file management:                BFD.                (line    6)
7723* object files:                          Options.            (line   29)
7724* object formats available:              BFD.                (line    6)
7725* object size:                           Options.            (line  309)
7726* OMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  445)
7727* ONLY_IF_RO:                            Output Section Constraint.
7728                                                             (line    6)
7729* ONLY_IF_RW:                            Output Section Constraint.
7730                                                             (line    6)
7731* opening object files:                  BFD outline.        (line    6)
7732* operators for arithmetic:              Operators.          (line    6)
7733* options:                               Options.            (line    6)
7734* ORDER (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   95)
7735* org =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   69)
7736* ORIGIN =:                              MEMORY.             (line   69)
7737* ORIGIN(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  155)
7738* orphan:                                Orphan Sections.    (line    6)
7739* output file after errors:              Options.            (line 1053)
7740* output file format in linker script:   Format Commands.    (line   10)
7741* output file name in linker script:     File Commands.      (line   64)
7742* output format:                         Options.            (line  956)
7743* output section alignment:              Forced Output Alignment.
7744                                                             (line    6)
7745* output section attributes:             Output Section Attributes.
7746                                                             (line    6)
7747* output section data:                   Output Section Data.
7748                                                             (line    6)
7749* OUTPUT(FILENAME):                      File Commands.      (line   64)
7750* OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH):                  Miscellaneous Commands.
7751                                                             (line   72)
7752* OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME):                Format Commands.    (line   10)
7753* OVERLAY:                               Overlay Description.
7754                                                             (line    6)
7755* overlays:                              Overlay Description.
7756                                                             (line    6)
7757* partial link:                          Options.            (line  489)
7758* PE import table prefixing:             ARM.                (line   23)
7759* PHDRS:                                 PHDRS.              (line    6)
7760* PIC_VENEER:                            ARM.                (line  134)
7761* position independent executables:      Options.            (line 1080)
7762* PowerPC ELF32 options:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line   16)
7763* PowerPC GOT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   33)
7764* PowerPC long branches:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
7765* PowerPC PLT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   16)
7766* PowerPC stub symbols:                  PowerPC ELF32.      (line   47)
7767* PowerPC TLS optimization:              PowerPC ELF32.      (line   51)
7768* PowerPC64 dot symbols:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
7769* PowerPC64 ELF64 options:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
7770* PowerPC64 multi-TOC:                   PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
7771* PowerPC64 OPD optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
7772* PowerPC64 OPD spacing:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
7773* PowerPC64 stub grouping:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
7774* PowerPC64 stub symbols:                PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
7775* PowerPC64 TLS optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
7776* PowerPC64 TOC optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
7777* precedence in expressions:             Operators.          (line    6)
7778* prevent unnecessary loading:           Output Section Type.
7779                                                             (line   22)
7780* program headers:                       PHDRS.              (line    6)
7781* program headers and sections:          Output Section Phdr.
7782                                                             (line    6)
7783* program headers, not enough room:      Builtin Functions.  (line  187)
7784* program segments:                      PHDRS.              (line    6)
7785* PROVIDE:                               PROVIDE.            (line    6)
7786* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:                        PROVIDE_HIDDEN.     (line    6)
7787* PUBLIC (MRI):                          MRI.                (line  103)
7788* QUAD(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
7789                                                             (line    6)
7790* quoted symbol names:                   Symbols.            (line    6)
7791* read-only text:                        Options.            (line  439)
7792* read/write from cmd line:              Options.            (line  445)
7793* region alias:                          REGION_ALIAS.       (line    6)
7794* region names:                          REGION_ALIAS.       (line    6)
7795* REGION_ALIAS(ALIAS, REGION):           REGION_ALIAS.       (line    6)
7796* regions of memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
7797* relative expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
7798* relaxing addressing modes:             Options.            (line 1094)
7799* relaxing on H8/300:                    H8/300.             (line    9)
7800* relaxing on i960:                      i960.               (line   31)
7801* relaxing on M68HC11:                   M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   12)
7802* relaxing on Xtensa:                    Xtensa.             (line   27)
7803* relocatable and absolute symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
7804* relocatable output:                    Options.            (line  489)
7805* removing sections:                     Output Section Discarding.
7806                                                             (line    6)
7807* reporting bugs in ld:                  Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
7808* requirements for BFD:                  BFD.                (line   16)
7809* retain relocations in final executable: Options.           (line  476)
7810* retaining specified symbols:           Options.            (line 1120)
7811* ROM initialized data:                  Output Section LMA. (line   39)
7812* round up expression:                   Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
7813* round up location counter:             Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
7814* runtime library name:                  Options.            (line  317)
7815* runtime library search path:           Options.            (line 1134)
7816* runtime pseudo-relocation:             WIN32.              (line  217)
7817* scaled integers:                       Constants.          (line   15)
7818* scommon section:                       Input Section Common.
7819                                                             (line   20)
7820* script files:                          Options.            (line  532)
7821* scripts:                               Scripts.            (line    6)
7822* search directory, from cmd line:       Options.            (line  368)
7823* search path in linker script:          File Commands.      (line   74)
7824* SEARCH_DIR(PATH):                      File Commands.      (line   74)
7825* SECT (MRI):                            MRI.                (line  109)
7826* section address:                       Output Section Address.
7827                                                             (line    6)
7828* section address in expression:         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
7829* section alignment:                     Builtin Functions.  (line   63)
7830* section alignment, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1434)
7831* section data:                          Output Section Data.
7832                                                             (line    6)
7833* section fill pattern:                  Output Section Fill.
7834                                                             (line    6)
7835* section load address:                  Output Section LMA. (line    6)
7836* section load address in expression:    Builtin Functions.  (line  139)
7837* section name:                          Output Section Name.
7838                                                             (line    6)
7839* section name wildcard patterns:        Input Section Wildcards.
7840                                                             (line    6)
7841* section size:                          Builtin Functions.  (line  166)
7842* section, assigning to memory region:   Output Section Region.
7843                                                             (line    6)
7844* section, assigning to program header:  Output Section Phdr.
7845                                                             (line    6)
7846* SECTIONS:                              SECTIONS.           (line    6)
7847* sections, discarding:                  Output Section Discarding.
7848                                                             (line    6)
7849* segment origins, cmd line:             Options.            (line 1285)
7850* SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT):       Builtin Functions.  (line  158)
7851* segments, ELF:                         PHDRS.              (line    6)
7852* shared libraries:                      Options.            (line 1213)
7853* SHORT(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
7854                                                             (line    6)
7855* SIZEOF(SECTION):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  166)
7856* SIZEOF_HEADERS:                        Builtin Functions.  (line  182)
7857* small common symbols:                  Input Section Common.
7858                                                             (line   20)
7859* SORT:                                  Input Section Wildcards.
7860                                                             (line   63)
7861* SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT:                     Input Section Wildcards.
7862                                                             (line   54)
7863* SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY:                 Input Section Wildcards.
7864                                                             (line   58)
7865* SORT_BY_NAME:                          Input Section Wildcards.
7866                                                             (line   46)
7867* SPU:                                   SPU ELF.            (line   29)
7868* SPU ELF options:                       SPU ELF.            (line    6)
7869* SPU extra overlay stubs:               SPU ELF.            (line   19)
7870* SPU local store size:                  SPU ELF.            (line   24)
7871* SPU overlay stub symbols:              SPU ELF.            (line   15)
7872* SPU overlays:                          SPU ELF.            (line    9)
7873* SPU plugins:                           SPU ELF.            (line    6)
7874* SQUAD(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
7875                                                             (line    6)
7876* stack size:                            Options.            (line 1941)
7877* standard Unix system:                  Options.            (line    7)
7878* start of execution:                    Entry Point.        (line    6)
7879* STARTUP(FILENAME):                     File Commands.      (line   82)
7880* strip all symbols:                     Options.            (line  519)
7881* strip debugger symbols:                Options.            (line  523)
7882* stripping all but some symbols:        Options.            (line 1120)
7883* STUB_GROUP_SIZE:                       ARM.                (line  139)
7884* SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN):            Forced Input Alignment.
7885                                                             (line    6)
7886* suffixes for integers:                 Constants.          (line   15)
7887* symbol defaults:                       Builtin Functions.  (line  119)
7888* symbol definition, scripts:            Assignments.        (line    6)
7889* symbol names:                          Symbols.            (line    6)
7890* symbol tracing:                        Options.            (line  597)
7891* symbol versions:                       VERSION.            (line    6)
7892* symbol-only input:                     Options.            (line  508)
7893* symbolic constants:                    Symbolic Constants. (line    6)
7894* symbols, from command line:            Options.            (line  877)
7895* symbols, relocatable and absolute:     Expression Section. (line    6)
7896* symbols, retaining selectively:        Options.            (line 1120)
7897* synthesizing linker:                   Options.            (line 1094)
7898* synthesizing on H8/300:                H8/300.             (line   14)
7899* TARGET(BFDNAME):                       Format Commands.    (line   35)
7900* TARGET1:                               ARM.                (line   32)
7901* TARGET2:                               ARM.                (line   37)
7902* text segment origin, cmd line:         Options.            (line 1292)
7903* thumb entry point:                     ARM.                (line   17)
7904* TI COFF versions:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
7905* traditional format:                    Options.            (line 1264)
7906* trampoline generation on M68HC11:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   31)
7907* trampoline generation on M68HC12:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   31)
7908* unallocated address, next:             Builtin Functions.  (line  149)
7909* undefined symbol:                      Options.            (line  554)
7910* undefined symbol in linker script:     Miscellaneous Commands.
7911                                                             (line   13)
7912* undefined symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1430)
7913* uninitialized data placement:          Input Section Common.
7914                                                             (line    6)
7915* unspecified memory:                    Output Section Data.
7916                                                             (line   39)
7917* usage:                                 Options.            (line  962)
7918* USE_BLX:                               ARM.                (line   74)
7919* using a DEF file:                      WIN32.              (line   57)
7920* using auto-export functionality:       WIN32.              (line   22)
7921* Using decorations:                     WIN32.              (line  162)
7922* variables, defining:                   Assignments.        (line    6)
7923* verbose[=NUMBER]:                      Options.            (line 1324)
7924* version:                               Options.            (line  581)
7925* version script:                        VERSION.            (line    6)
7926* version script, symbol versions:       Options.            (line 1332)
7927* VERSION {script text}:                 VERSION.            (line    6)
7928* versions of symbols:                   VERSION.            (line    6)
7929* VFP11_DENORM_FIX:                      ARM.                (line   83)
7930* warnings, on combining symbols:        Options.            (line 1343)
7931* warnings, on section alignment:        Options.            (line 1434)
7932* warnings, on undefined symbols:        Options.            (line 1430)
7933* weak externals:                        WIN32.              (line  407)
7934* what is this?:                         Overview.           (line    6)
7935* wildcard file name patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
7936                                                             (line    6)
7937* Xtensa options:                        Xtensa.             (line   56)
7938* Xtensa processors:                     Xtensa.             (line    6)
7939
7940
7941
7942Tag Table:
7943Node: Top941
7944Node: Overview1749
7945Node: Invocation2863
7946Node: Options3271
7947Node: Environment95990
7948Node: Scripts97750
7949Node: Basic Script Concepts99484
7950Node: Script Format102191
7951Node: Simple Example103054
7952Node: Simple Commands106150
7953Node: Entry Point106656
7954Node: File Commands107589
7955Node: Format Commands111590
7956Node: REGION_ALIAS113546
7957Node: Miscellaneous Commands118378
7958Node: Assignments121986
7959Node: Simple Assignments122477
7960Node: PROVIDE124213
7961Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN125418
7962Node: Source Code Reference125662
7963Node: SECTIONS129242
7964Node: Output Section Description131133
7965Node: Output Section Name132220
7966Node: Output Section Address133096
7967Node: Input Section135331
7968Node: Input Section Basics136132
7969Node: Input Section Wildcards140038
7970Node: Input Section Common145038
7971Node: Input Section Keep146520
7972Node: Input Section Example147010
7973Node: Output Section Data147978
7974Node: Output Section Keywords150755
7975Node: Output Section Discarding154324
7976Node: Output Section Attributes155505
7977Node: Output Section Type156606
7978Node: Output Section LMA157677
7979Node: Forced Output Alignment160748
7980Node: Forced Input Alignment161016
7981Node: Output Section Constraint161405
7982Node: Output Section Region161833
7983Node: Output Section Phdr162266
7984Node: Output Section Fill162930
7985Node: Overlay Description164072
7986Node: MEMORY168374
7987Node: PHDRS172708
7988Node: VERSION177962
7989Node: Expressions186055
7990Node: Constants186984
7991Node: Symbolic Constants187859
7992Node: Symbols188410
7993Node: Orphan Sections189157
7994Node: Location Counter190321
7995Node: Operators194757
7996Node: Evaluation195679
7997Node: Expression Section197043
7998Node: Builtin Functions200700
7999Node: Implicit Linker Scripts208656
8000Node: Machine Dependent209431
8001Node: H8/300210484
8002Node: i960212109
8003Node: M68HC11/68HC12214313
8004Node: ARM215767
8005Node: HPPA ELF32224177
8006Node: M68K225800
8007Node: MIPS226709
8008Node: MMIX227233
8009Node: MSP430228398
8010Node: PowerPC ELF32229447
8011Node: PowerPC64 ELF64232285
8012Node: SPU ELF236701
8013Node: TI COFF239333
8014Node: WIN32239859
8015Node: Xtensa259984
8016Node: BFD262949
8017Node: BFD outline264404
8018Node: BFD information loss265690
8019Node: Canonical format268207
8020Node: Reporting Bugs272564
8021Node: Bug Criteria273258
8022Node: Bug Reporting273957
8023Node: MRI281007
8024Node: GNU Free Documentation License285650
8025Node: LD Index310806
8026
8027End Tag Table
8028